Home

Maytag 8182969 Washer/Dryer User Manual

Contents

1. Fuels coolants lubricants etc Engine oils Engine oils are specifically tested for their suitability in our engines Therefore use only engine oils recommended by Mercedes Benz Information on recommended brands is available in the Factory Approved Service Products pam phlet or at your authorized Mercedes Benz Center Please follow FSS recommendations for scheduled oil changes Failure to do so could result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Engine oil additives Do not blend oil additives with engine oil They may be harmful to the engine opera tion Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending oil additives are not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Air conditioning refrigerant R 134a HFC refrigerant and special PAG lubricating oil is used in the air condition ing system Never use R 12 CFC or mineral based lubricating oil otherwise damage to the system will occur Brake fluid During vehicle operation the boiling point of the brake fluid is continuously reduced through the absorption of moisture from the atmosphere Under extremely strenu ous operating conditions this moisture content can lead to the formation of bub bles in the system thus reducing the sys tem s efficiency Therefore the brake fluid must be replaced every two years preferably in the spring Only brake fluid approved by Mercedes Benz is recommended Your authoriz
2. Ashtrays Removing ashtray insert Center console ashtray Warning A NY LS ee G jl ramm Remove front ashtray only with vehicle standing still Set the parking brake to se cure vehicle from movement Move gear se lector lever to position N With gear selector lever in position N turn off the engine gt Secure vehicle from movement by set ting the parking brake Move the selec tor lever to position N Opening ashtray Now you have more room to take out gt Briefly touch cover plate 1 the insert gt Slide ashtray insert in direction of The ashtray opens automatically arrow 2 unni iedise gegts gt Grip ashtray at indents arrows 3 and remove insert from ashtray frame Reinstalling ashtray insert gt Install insert by pushing back into frame until it engages again Controls in detail Useful features Rear seat ashtray OP ee Opening ashtray gt Pull at top of cover 2 to open ashtray Removing ashtray insert gt Press latch 1 to disengage ashtray in sert and remove it Reinstalling the ashtray insert gt Install ashtray insert gt Close the ashtray Controls in detail Useful features Cigarette lighter Warning A The cigarette lighter is located in the cen ter console compartment in front of the Never touch the heating element or sides of armrest gt page 25 the lighter they are extremely hot Hold the knob only p When leaving the vehicle always
3. ee eeeeeeeeeeees 227 Winter driving instructions 228 Standing water seess 229 Passenger compartment 230 Driving abroad eee 230 Control and operation of radio transmitter eeeseeeeeeee 230 Catalytic Converter ccseeeeees 231 Emission control 231 Coolant temperature 06 232 At the gas station Check regularly and before along Ups nscevancssadsecessiacivatassonecs Engine compartment eee HOOD aseeseen raas Engine oil Transmission fluid level Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system Tires and wheels Important guidelines 0 0 Life OF tilenn Direction of rotation ce Checking tire inflation pressure Rotating wheels Winter driving eee eeeeeeeeeeeeereeeees Winter tires ccsesccceeessteceeeeees Block heater Canada only SNOW ChaiNS ccceeeesseceeeeeseees Maintenance Clearing the service indicator Service term exceeded 247 247 247 Calling up the service indicator 248 Resetting the service indicator 248 Vehicle Cafe Cleaning and care of vehicle 249 Practical hints eee 255 What to do if eee eeeeeeseeeeeereeeeeeeeees 256 Lamps in instrument cluster 256 Lamp in center console 260 Messages in the display 261 Where will find sesse 279 Firstaid Kites 279 Vehicle tool kit
4. Controls in detail Driving systems A Cruise control is a convenience system de signed to assist the driver during vehicle op eration The driver is and must remain at all times responsible for the vehicle speed and for safe brake operation Warning Only use cruise control if the road traffic and weather conditions make it advisable to travel at a steady speed e The use of cruise control can be danger ous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a steady speed e The use of cruise control can be danger ous on slippery roads Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control e Deactivate cruise control when driving in fog The Resume function should only be oper ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ ously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed Controls in detail Driving systems si m On uphill or downhill grades cruise Vehicles with automatic transmission control may not be able to maintain the Moving gear selector lever to set speed Once the grade eases the position N while driving also cancels set speed will be resumed cruise control However the gear se lector lever should not be moved to Canceling cruise control position N while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skid There are several ways to cancel cruise ding e g on icy roads m P54 25 2985
5. Replace the bulb as soon as possible CHECK LAMPS FRONT FOGLAMP R The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible CHECK LAMPS REAR FOGLAMP The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible CHECK LAMPS REVERSE LAMP L The left backup lamp is malfunctioning Replace the bulb as soon as possible CHECK LAMPS REVERSE LAMP R The right backup lamp is malfunctioning gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible CHECK LAMPS Display TAIL LAMP L HECK LAMPS UBSTITUTE LAMP ON AIL LAMP R HECK LAMPS UBSTITUTE LAMP ON C 5 T C SIDE MARKER LAMP LF CHECK LAMPS SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON SIDE MARKER LAMP RF CHECK LAMPS SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON A R L T UTOM LIGHT 0 EMOVE KEY IGHTS URN OFF LAMPS SEAT BELT SYSTEM VISIT WORKSHOP DRIVER S SEAT BELT FASTEN SEAT BELT Possible cause The left tail lamp is malfunctioning A backup bulb is being used The right tail lamp is malfunctioning A backup bulb is being used The left parking lamps are malfunctioning A backup bulb is being used The right parking lamps are malfunctioning A backup bulb is being used Key in the starter switch position 1 or 2 This display appears if the driver s door is opened with the engine shut off and no key in the starter switch The seat belt system is malfunctioning The display reminds you and y
6. The selector lever is locked again when moving it to position P Practical hints Opening closing in an emergency Opening closing in an emergency Sliding pop up roof You can open or close the sliding pop up roof manually should an electrical malfunc tion occur The sliding pop up roof drive is located behind the lens 1 of the interior overhead light P68 00 3102 31 i gt Slide both locking tabs 2 indirectionof Obtain crank 3 Q AITON Insert crank 3 through hole P68 00 3103 31 v Lower rear of cover and remove gt Turn crank 3 clockwise to Remova cover e slide roof closed e raise roof at the rear 4 P68 00 3101 31 Do not disconnect electrical connec gt Turn crank 3 counterclockwise to gt Pry of lens 1 using a flat blade screw we e slide roof open driver e lower roof at the rear The sliding pop up roof must be resyn chronized after being operated manually gt page 192 Practical hints Replacing bulbs Replacing bulbs Safe vehicle operation depends on proper exterior lighting and signaling It is there fore essential that all bulbs and lamp as semblies are in good working order at all times Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely important Have headlamps checked and readjusted at regular intervals and when a bulb has been replaced See your autho rized Mercedes Benz Center for headlamp adjustment i Backup bulbs will be brought into use
7. To prevent fuel vapors from escaping into open air fully insert filler nozzle unit Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle unit cuts out do not top up or overfill Warning A Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pres sure in the system which could cause a gas discharge This could cause the gas to spray back out when removing the fuel pump noz zle which could cause personal injury gt Replace the fuel cap by turning it to the right You will hear when the fuel cap is tight ened gt Close the fuel filler flap Operation At the gas station i Use only premium unleaded gasoline with a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91 average of 96 RON 86 MON Information on gasoline quality can normally be found on the fuel pump More information on gasoline can be found in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet Flexible Fuel Vehicles MY 2003 Mercedes Benz C 320 models except those equipped with manual transmis sion or 4MATIC More information on Flexible Fuel Vehi cles can be found in the Technical da ta section gt page 334 i Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap open can cause the fag lamp to illuminate See also Practical hints section gt page 259 Check regularly and before a long trip 1 Coolant level More information on the coolant level can be found in the Operation section gt page 238 2 Brake fluid fuse box cov
8. sseeneeeseesessees 279 Spare wheel cccssccccesesseeeees 281 Unlocking locking in an emergency 285 Unlocking the vehicle 0 285 Locking the vehicle 286 Changing batteries eee 286 Fuel filler flap ee eeeseeeesseeeeneeee 287 Manually unlocking the transmission selector lever 288 Opening closing in an emergency 289 Sliding pop up roof oo eee 289 Replacing bulbs eee eeeeeeseeeeeseeeees 290 ENEI OAE EE E E A 290 Replacing bulbs for front lamps 292 Side marker lamp bulb 294 Replacing bulbs for rear lamps 295 Replacing wiper blades eeee 296 REMOVING srecni 296 INSTAINING ccs cesestssscsenaceiciecsvecsqessceass 296 Flat tire nonciation 297 Preparing the vehicle 297 Mounting the spare wheel 297 Battery vavczierst vcscccetaacaveactacivcseseecasasatas 303 Disconnecting the battery 304 Removing the battery 304 Charging and reinstalling the battery eeeeeeesscceeeesreeeseees 304 Reconnecting the battery 305 JUMP StAMLING osncsccisccscsccesiocisccseieasvazesan 306 Towing the Vehicle eee eee cece 308 Installing towing eye bolt 311 F SSE Shii eae EE A 312 Fuse box in passenger COMPALtMEN sesers 312 Fuse box in engine COmMpartment seeeeeeeererreeerree 312 Auxiliary fuse box in trunk 313 Technical data cccecessseeee
9. with a built in or attached antenna i e with f 5 out being connected to an external antenna In an accident during hard braking or sud from inside the vehicle while the engine is Please do not forget that your primary re sponsibility is to drive the vehicle safely Only operate the COMAND Cockpit Man agement and Data System radio or tele phone if road weather and traffic conditions permit jects Radio transmitters such as a portable tele Bear in mind that at d of just 30 mph Bp ee ea eerie phone or a citizens band unit should only PP y ay be used inside the vehicle if they are con i dist f imatel en Wes ee eae ee aoe y ae nected to an antenna that is installed on PP ee By the outside of the vehicle ond den maneuvers loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle running Doing so could lead to a malfunc tion of the vehicle s electronic system possibly resulting in an accident and personal injury The trunk is the preferred place to carry ob Driving abroad Abroad there is a widely spread Mercedes Benz service network at your disposal If you plan to drive into areas Observe all legal requirements which are not listed in the index of your Mercedes Benz Center directory you should request pertinent information from your authorized Mercedes Benz Center Refer to the radio transmit
10. Fully closing windows gt Pull switch past resistance point and release The window closes completely If the upward movement of the window is blocked during the closing procedure the window will stop and open slightly A Warning Driver s door only If within five seconds the switch 1 is again pulled past the resistance point and re leased the automatic reversal will not oper ate Stopping windows gt Press or pull respective switch again i You can also open or close the win dows using the e SmartKey summer opening con venience feature see below e button in the control panel of the climate control gt page 149 or automatic climate control gt page 157 e button E J in the control panel of the automatic climate control gt page 157 Opening and closing the windows with the Smartkey The sliding pop up roof will also be opened or closed when the power windows are operated with the key gt page 191 A Warning Never operate the windows or slid ing pop up roof if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure In case the procedure causes potential danger the procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the control button To reverse direction of movement press button for opening or for closing gt Aim transmitter eye at the front door handle Opening Summer opening feature gt Press and hold bu
11. Insert new bulb in socket push in and twist clockwise Reinsert bulb socket in lamp and twist clockwise Parking and standing lamp bulb gt Switch off the lights gt Open the hood gt page 235 gt Press the clamp and remove headlamp cover 2 gt Pull out the bulb socket 6 with the bulb Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket Insert a new bulb in the socket Reinstall the bulb socket v v v Vy Align headlamp cover 2 and click into place Bi Xenon headlamps A Do not remove the cover 3 for the Bi Xenon headlamp Because of high voltage in Bi Xenon lamps it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its compo nents We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician Warning e4 P82 10 3311 31 1 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp 2 Headlamp cover for high beam head lamp parking and standing lamp 3 Headlamp cover for Bi Xenon lamp Practical hints Replacing bulbs P82 10 3312 31 4 High beam headlamp bulb 5 Bayonet socket for high beam headlamp bulb 6 Bulb socket for parking and standing lamp bulb High beam bulb gt gt gt Switch off the lights Open the hood gt page 235 Press the clamp and remove headlamp cover 2 Pull electrical connector 4 off gt D Practical hints Replacing bulbs Twist bayonet socket 5 counterclock wise to the stop do not remove Pull the bulb out of the socket
12. gt i Your vehicle may or may not have the fader function depending on the vehi cle equipment and model In radio cassette and CD mode press the AUD key repeatedly until FADER ap pears on the display FADER EEEE un E EE un lt F ExT AUD Re Press the F or R key to shift the sound accordingly or Press both the F and R keys simulta neously to reset the fader to its center level Controls in detail Audio system Balance gt In radio cassette and CD mode press the AUD key repeatedly until BALANCE appears on the display FM BALAHCE E EEE l EEEE L ExT AUO R gt gt Press the L or R key to shift the sound accordingly or gt Press both the L and R keys simulta neously to reset the balance to its cen ter level Returning audio functions to factory set Audio system sound selection EXT tings gt In radio cassette and CD mode press the AUD key RESET The sound settings menu appears on the display gt Inradio cassette and CD mode press gt Press the EXT key and hold the AUD key longer than two a SOUND seconds RESET will appear on the dis rie Tice play Se eee ee DRL SP ANE OFF All settings for bass treble and balance are returned to center and the volume gt Press one of the function keys is set to a predefined level You can select from among the follow ing settings e DRV The tone level is set to the Driver position sound is directed toward
13. FMS ST FMI 935 5 MHz 29 3 MHz AM WE AUD AS AM WE AUD AS Press the Ej button gt Press and hold either the EN or EA gt Press either the EXE or I button Enter the desired frequency with the a the desired frequency is The radio will tune to the next receiv buttons 1 to 0 Meee able station at a higher or lower fre Step by step station tuning takes place quency si in ascending or descending order of You can only enter frequencies within frequency The first three tuning steps the respective waveband will take place without muting After ward the radio will be muted and high speed tuning will take place until the button is released If a button is not pressed within four seconds the radio will return to the last tuned station Scan tuning e Starting scan tuning gt Select the desired frequency band FMi 25 2 MHz AM WE AUD AS gt Press the button SC will appear on the display The radio briefly tunes into all receiv able stations on the band selected The first scan will tune only the sta tions with a strong signal The sec ond scan will tune every receivable station e Ending scan tuning gt Press the button or the Ng EA BSE or BEE button SC disappears from the display Station memory You can store ten AM and ten FM stations e Storing stations gt Tune in the desired station gt Press and hold the desired station button 1 to O until a brief signal tone is heard
14. If the system does not detect a sound signal the cassette will automatically fast forward to the next sound signal Switching off the skip blank function gt Press the SB key The inversed color SB display disap pears Dolby NR noise reduction system To enable optimum sound reproduction of cassettes recorded using Dolby B NR the Dolby NR system should be switched on The Dolby NR function should be switched off when playing cassettes not recorded with Dolby B NR Switching on gt Press the NR key NR appears on the display in in versed color format DOLBY and the double D symbol fP are trade marks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpora tion The Dolby noise reduction system is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Controls in detail Audio system Switching off gt Press the NR key again The inversed color NR display disa pears Controls in detail Audio system CD changer operating mode General notes Should excessively high temperatures oc cur while in CD mode CD TEMP HIGH will appear on the display and muting will take place The unit will then switch back to the last operating mode used until the temper ature has decreased to a safe operating level Should excessively low temperatures oc cur while in CD mode CD TEMP LOW will ap pear on the display but the CD will continue to play Handle CDs carefully to
15. MON Motor Octane Number The Motor Octane Number for gasoline as determined by a standardized meth od It is an indication of a gasoline s ability to resist undesired detonation knocking The average of both the MON Motor Octane Number and gt RON Research Octane Number is posted at the pump also known as ANTI KNOCK INDEX The display field in the instrument clus ter used to present information provid ed by the control system Multifunction steering wheel Steering wheel with buttons for operat ing the control system Overspeed range Engine speeds within the red marking of the tachometer dial Avoid this en gine speed range as it may result in se rious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Technical terms Poly V belt drive Drives engine components alternator AC compressor etc from the engine Power train Collective term designating all compo nents used to generate and transmit motive power to the drive axles includ ing e engine e clutch torque converter e transmission e transfer case e drive shaft e axle shafts axles Program mode selector switch Used to switch the automatic transmis sion between standard operation S and winter operation W Remote Vehicle Diagnostics Transmission of vehicle data and cur rent location to the Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Center for sub scribers to Tele Aid service Restraint systems Seat
16. e To select the reverse side of the tape press button below track number on the audio system display or enter request on the COMAND system located in the center dashboard NAVI menu Malfunction memory menu The NAV menu contains the functions needed to operate your navigation system gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the message NAV in the display If the navigation system is switched off the message NAV OFF is shown in the display If the navigation system is on the message NAV ACTIVE is shown in the display Please refer to the COMAND manual for instructions on how to activate the route guidance system Use the malfunction memory menu to scan malfunction and warning messages that may be stored in the system What information is shown in the display depends on whether malfunctions have actually occurred Warning A Malfunction and warning messages are only indicated for certain systems and are inten tionally not very detailed The malfunction and warning messages are simply a remind er with respect to the operation of certain systems and do not replace the owner s and or driver s responsibility to maintain the vehicle s operating safety by having all required maintenance and safety checks performed on the vehicle and by bringing the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes Benz Center to address the malfunction and warning messages gt page 261 I gt Press button or rep
17. sponse Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Cana da as soon as possible Controls in detail Useful features Upgrade signals The Tele Aid system processes calls using the following priority e Automatic emergency First priority e Manual emergency Second priority e Roadside assistance Third priority e Information Fourth priority Should a higher priority call be initiated while you are connected an upgrade al ternating tone will be heard and the ap propriate indicator lamp will flash If certain information such as vehicle identi fication number or customer information is not available the operator may need to re transmit During this time you will hear a beep and voice contact will be interrupted Voice contact will resume once the retransmis sion is completed Once a call is conclud ed a beep will be heard and the appropriate indicator lamp will stop flash ing The COMAND system operation will resume Controls in detail Useful features If the indicator lamp continues to flash or the system does not reset contact the Response Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada or Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance at 1 800 FOR MERCedes 1 800 367 6372 in the USA or Cus tomer Service at 1 800 387 0100 in Canada The indicator lamp in the respective button flashes until the call is conclud ed Calls can only be terminated by a Resp
18. until you see this message in the is deactivated e you put the key in the starter switch es y display EASY ENTRY FEATURE and ACTIVATE STEERING COLUMN Only the steer e press the appropriate stored position ing column is button on the memory switch The selection marker is on the current moved gt page 99 setting STEERING COLUMN Both the e SEAT steering column and the seat are To cancel seat steering wheel moved movement do one of the following e press the seat adjustment switch gt page 34 P54 30 gt Press or E to change the easy entry exit setting e move the steering column stalk gt page 38 e press the memory switch gt page 99 Controls in detail Control system Setting key dependency Setting parking position for exterior rear The selection marker is on the current Use this function to set whether the VEM uet setting memory settings for the seats the steering Use the MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING wheel and the mirrors should be stored function to select whether the passen separately for each key gt page 84 ger side exterior rear view mirror should be k Movatheselectontmarkarwith turned downward during parking maneu when reverse gear is engaged the or ESM button to the r pple CONVENIENCE submenu For additional information see Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position Press or J to switch function gt Press button or re
19. A voice connection between the Roadside Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of the vehicle will be established When a voice connection is established the audio Controls in detail Useful features system mutes and the message TELE AID ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE CALL ACTIVE ap pears in the multifunction display gt Describe the nature of the need for as sistance The Mercedes Benz Roadside assistance dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified Mercedes Benz technician or arrange to tow your vehicle to the nearest Mercedes Benz Center For services such as labor and or towing charges may ap ply Refer to the Roadside Assistance man ual for more information These programs are only available in the USA e Sign and Drive services Services such as jump start a few gallons of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire with the vehicle spare tire are obtainable e Remote Vehicle Diagnostics This func tion permits the Mercedes Benz Road side Assistance dispatcher to download malfunction codes and actual vehicle data Controls in detail Useful features i The indicator lamp in the Roadside As sistance button remains illumi nated in red for approx ten seconds during the system self check after turn ing the key in the starter switch to position 2 together with the SOS but ton and the Information button my See system self check gt page 210 when the indicator lamp does not light up in red or s
20. Adding 237 Checking level 236 Consumption 236 Dipstick 236 Filler neck 237 Viscosity 342 Oil level Checking 234 One touch gearshifting 139 Canceling gear range limit 139 Downshifting 139 Upshifting 139 Opening Ashtray 207 Cup holders 204 Doors from the inside 87 Fuel filler flap 233 Fuel filler flap manually 287 Glove box 203 Hood 235 Side windows 188 Sliding pop up roof 190 289 Sliding pop up roof in an emergency 289 Sliding pop up roof with SmartKey 191 Trunk 86 88 Trunk from the inside 88 Windows 187 Windows with SmartKey 188 Operating Audio system 165 Cassette player 118 CD player 117 COMAND see separate operating instructions Garage door opener 220 Integrated remote control 220 Navigation system 118 Radio 115 117 Radio transmitters 230 Safety 16 Telephone 134 165 182 Vehicle outside the USA and Canada 13 Operating safety 16 Audio system 165 Operator s Manual 10 Ornamental moldings 251 Outer seats Rear seat head restraints 95 Outside temperature indicator 110 Overdue service 247 Overhead control panel 27 Overspeed range 343 P Paintwork 250 Panic alarm 72 Panic button on SmartKey 72 Parcel net In front passenger footwell 206 Parking 51 225 Parking brake 45 51 Engaging 51 Message in display 264 Releasing 45 Parking lamps Replacing bulbs 290 291 293 294 Switchingon 101 Parking position Exterior rear view mirrors 100 131 145 Parts see Spare parts service 316 Pas
21. Audio system i Selecting CDs CDs which have been inserted improp pi a are unreadable will not be HO coz FOM RPT AUD gt Push the magazine into the CD changer gt You can select from among the CDs in in the direction shown by the arrow and the CD magazine using buttons 1 to 6 close the sliding door CD and the magazine slot number of the selected CD appear on the display The 1CD Playing CDs number of the current track is dis 2 CD changer gt Press the button played after TRACK 3 CD tray CD will appear on the display If there is no CD in the selected maga 4 CD magazine zine slot NO CD appears on the display The CD most recently listened to will then start playing at the point where it was last switched off gt Place the CD in the recess of the tray After the last track on a CD has finished label side up the next CD is automatically played gt Remove the magazine and pull the CD with the corresponding slot number tray fully out gt Push the tray into the magazine in the direction shown by the arrow Controls in detail Audio system Skipping tracks forward backward Fast forward reverse Skipping tracks forward Fast forward gt Press the IXE button gt Press and hold the EN button until The next track will be played Reverse gt Press and hold the iy button until Skipping tracks backward gt Press the EEJ button If the track has been playing for more than ten seconds
22. Cial 7 8 9 PQRS TUV WXYZ 0 E er OPR SC P82 60 3769 31 Controls in detail Audio system Item Page Item Page Item Page CD mode selector 178 5 Alpha numeric keypad 9 Cassette eject 175 Manual tuning 172 Band selection 171 10 Cassette mode selector 174 radio station buttons radio 11 Telephone mode selec 182 Fast forward reverse 176 CD selection CD 179 tor cassette CD 180 Telephone number entry 182 12 Seek tuning radio 172 Speed dialing memory 185 retrieving speed dialing Track search cassette 175 telephone memory telephone CD 1 80 Radio mode selector 171 6 Scanning radio cas 173 Speed dialing memory 185 Display sette CD oe telephone 13 On off 168 Function button 172 Volume 168 Soft keys 168 Controls in detail Audio system Button and soft key operation In these instructions the alpha numeric keypad right side of radio face and the function buttons left side of the radio face are referred to as buttons and the four keys under the display are referred to as soft keys i Do not press directly on the radio dis play face Operation Switching on off Switching on gt Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the starter switch or gt Turn control knob ROJ i If the radio is turned on without the key in the ignition it will automatically turn off again after approx 30 minutes Switching off gt Remove the ke
23. Controls in detail Audio system i The cassette will not be ejected when the system is switched off or switched to another operating mode Track search backward gt Press the I button SEEK RWD will appear on the display The track search will run the tape back ward to the start of the track currently playing and switch to play Stopping track search gt Press the FAG EA EI o Kl button The cassette will switch over to Play Controls in detail Audio system Scanning TAFE Si SEEK FWO TRE HE AUDO Se gt Press the button SC will appear on the display Each track on the cassette will be played briefly in ascending order Stopping scan gt Press the el EN EA Ie or EJ button The system will switch to Play Fast forward reverse Stopping the cassette fast forward re Starting cassette fast forward mode versemode gt Press the EN EA EI o Ka TAPE button FORWARD The cassette will switch over to the TRE HE AUD Se play mode gt Press the EN button FORWARD will appear on the display Starting cassette fast reverse mode gt Press the hy button REWIND will appear on the display The cassette will automatically switch over to the play mode at the end or beginning of the tape Skipping blank sections skip blank Switching on the skip blank function TAPE SIDE 1 TRE HE AUD Se gt Press the SB key SB appears on the display in in versed color format
24. Functions in 119 Individual vehicle settings 119 Submenus 120 Shift lock 344 Shifting Gear selector lever positions 141 Gearshift lever 137 Into optimal gear range automatic transmission 139 Into reverse manual transmission 137 Side impact airbags 61 Side marker lamps Replacing bulbs Side windows Automatic opening 188 Cleaning 251 Closing 187 188 Closing with SmartKey 188 Opening 187 188 Opening fully 188 Opening with SmartKey 188 Stopping 188 Synchronizing power windows 189 Signal strength telephone 134 Simultaneous wiping and washing Windshield wipers 49 Single wipe 49 Ski sack 196 Removing 199 Unfolding and loading 196 Unloading and folding 198 Sliding pop up roof 190 Closing 190 289 Closing with SmartKey 191 290 291 294 Opening 190 289 Opening with SmartKey 191 Stopping 191 Synchronizing 192 SmartKey Changing battery 286 Locking and unlocking 84 Opening and closing the sliding pop up roof with 191 Opening and closing windows with 188 Unlocking with 30 Snow chains 246 Soft keys Audio system 168 Spare fuses 313 Spare parts service 316 Spare wheel 281 Bolts 282 Minispare 300 Mounting 297 Removing 281 Speed Saving current 194 Speed settings Cruise control 195 Speedometer 23 Settings units 123 Speedometer display mode Selecting 123 Split rear bench seat 199 SRS 63 344 Indicator lamp 257 Standing lamps 101 Replacing bulbs Standing water Driving instructions 22
25. Insert the new bulb so that the base locates in the recess in the bayonet socket 5 Twist bayonet socket clockwise until you hear it snap into place Plug the connector onto the bulb gt Align headlamp cover 2 and click into place Front turn signal lamp bulb gt gt gt Switch off the lights Open the hood gt page 235 Twist bulb socket 1 counterclockwise and pull out Push bulb into socket turn counter clockwise and remove gt gt Insert new bulb in socket push in and twist clockwise Reinsert bulb socket in lamp and twist clockwise Parking and standing lamp bulb gt gt gt v v v v Switch off the lights Open the hood gt page 235 Press the clamp and remove headlamp cover 2 Pull out the bulb socket 6 with the bulb Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket Insert a new bulb in the socket Reinstall the bulb socket Align headlamp cover 2 and click into place Side marker lamp bulb v v v Vy v v v 2 10 3126 31 Switch off the lights Carefully slide lamp towards rear Remove front end first Twist bulb socket counterclockwise and pull out Pull bulb out of the bulb socket Insert new bulb in socket Reinstall bulb socket push in and twist clockwise To reinstall lamp set rear end in bumper and let front end snap into place Practical hints Replacing bulbs Replacing bulbs for rear lamps License plate lamp Tail lamp a
26. Power seat 94 Removing 94 Front seats Heater 97 FSS Flexible Service System 247 342 Fuel 234 Additives 334 Cruising range 335 E85 Ethanol fuel 335 Fuel reserve warning lamp 259 Gasoline additives 334 Premium unleaded gasoline 234 330 333 Requirements 333 334 Reserve warning 23 Switching Flexible fuel vehicle 334 Technical data 329 Fuel additives 334 Fuel consumption statistics After start 132 Since last reset 132 133 Fuel filler flap 233 Locking 233 Opening 287 Unlocking 233 Fuel requirements 333 For ethanol fuel 334 Fuel reserve tank Message in display 272 Fuel tank Capacity 330 Filler flap 233 Fuels coolants lubricants etc Capacities 329 Functions control system Resetting 120 Fuse box 312 Fuse chart 312 Fuse extractor 313 Fuses 312 Auxiliary fuse box in the trunk 313 Fuse box in engine compartment 312 Fuse box in passenger compartment 312 Fuse chart 312 Fuse extractor 313 Spare fuses 313 112 115 G Garage door opener 27 217 Erasing in remote control 220 Integrated remote control 218 Rolling code programming 219 Gasoline see Fuel 234 Gasoline additives 334 Gear range 342 Automatic transmission 140 Limiting 140 Shifting into optimal 139 Gear range limit Canceling 139 Gear selector lever Cleaning 252 Position 141 Global Locking 85 Unlocking 85 Global Positioning System GPS 342 Glove box 21 203 Closing 203 Opening 203 Good visibility 144 GPS 342 GPS see COMAND 21
27. Setting the temperature 150 Audio and telephone operation 165 Loading instructions eesee 202 Adjusting air distribution and Operating safety 0 0 eeeeeseees 165 Useful features 203 VOU Erreseina ianooii 151 Operating and display elements 166 Interior storage Spaces 203 Defrosting eesssesssessseesssessseessesss 151 Button and soft key operation 168 ASHUAYS sists cstensbevehiseeasiacdenes 207 Air recirculation mode 152 Operation seinri ss Cigarette lighter eee 208 Rear window defroster 0 153 Radio MOE eee eeeeeeesseeeeereeeeeees Telephone gt csheseswveteweisl soiehlavboucien 208 Deactivating the climate control Cassette mode TOlGsAId n oneei eins 209 SyStEM kateen aa 153 CD changer operating mode 178 Garage door Opener 217 Air conditioning 154 Telephone operation 008 182 Ventilated storage compartment 155 Rear passenger compartment adjustable air vents 155 Operation aaae eesse eee 221 The first 1000 miles 1500 km 222 Driving instructions eee eee 223 Drive sensibly save fuel 223 Drinking and driving ee 223 Pedals nnen an e 223 Power assistance s 224 Brake See ea aes ra Raa 224 Driving Off ee eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeees 225 Parking cnn 225 TIES sodi rie 226 Hydroplaning eee eee eeeeeeee 227 Tire traction cccccccessssseceesssneeees 227 Tire speed rating
28. Windshield wipers 48 Symbols 15 Synchronizing Power windows 189 Sliding pop up roof 192 T Tachometer 23 109 Displaying gear range 140 Overspeed range 109 Tail lamps Cleaning 251 Replacing bulbs 291 295 Tar stains 250 Technical data 332 Brake fluid 332 Coolant 329 Coolants 336 Electrical system 326 Engine oil 332 Engine oil additives 332 Flexible fuel vehicles 334 Fuel requirements 333 Fuels 329 Gasoline additives 334 Lubricants 329 Main dimensions 327 Premium unleaded gasoline 333 Rims and tires 322 Weights 328 Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system 331 338 Tele Aid 209 Emergency calls 211 Information 214 Initiating an emergency call manually 212 Messages in display 277 Remote door unlock 216 Roadside assistance 213 SOS button 212 Stolen vehicle tracking services 217 System self check 210 Tele Aid System 210 345 Upgrade signals 215 Telematics 345 Telephone 24 208 Answering acall 135 Dialing a number from the phone book 135 Emergency call 185 Ending a call 135 Hands free microphone 27 Loading phone book 135 Messages in display 277 Operation 134 182 Redialing 136 Signal strength 134 Temperature Display mode 123 Grades of tires 340 Setting interior temperature 150 158 Setting units in display 123 Tires 244 Tightening torque Wheel bolts 301 345 Tilt Head restraint 34 Time Setting hours 122 Setting minutes 122 Time display Setting 123 Tire inflation pressure Checki
29. coolants lubricants etc 329 Cargo area see Trunk 86 Casette mode Playing cassettes 174 Cassette player Operating 118 Catalytic converter 231 CD changer 178 CD mode 178 CD player Operating 117 Center console 25 AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 260 Lower part 26 Upper part 25 Centigrade Setting temperature units 123 Central locking Automatic 91 From inside 92 Switch 92 Switching on off control system 129 Unlocking from inside 92 Central locking switch 92 Certification label 318 Changing Batteries SmartKey 287 Key setting 129 Changing CDs 178 Charcoal filter 161 Charging Vehicle battery 304 CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator lamp 259 Checking Brake fluid 234 Coolant level 234 238 Oillevel 234 236 Tire inflate pressure 234 Vehicle lighting 234 Child safety 65 Airbags 58 Infant and child restraint systems 62 65 LATCH child seat anchors 69 Child safety switch see Blocking of rear door window operation 71 Child seat anchors see LATCH child seat anchors 70 Cigarette lighter 208 Cleaning Cup holder 252 Gear selector lever 252 Hard plastic trim items 252 Headlamps 146 Headliner 252 Instrument cluster 252 Leather upholstery 253 Light alloy wheels 252 MB Tex upholstery 253 Plastic and rubber parts 252 Seat belts 252 Steering wheel 252 Windows 251 Windshield 49 Wiper blades 251 Climate control 148 Adjusting 151 Defogging windshield 151 Defrosting 151 Setting the temperature 150 Clock 2
30. page 48 and for setting the rear view mirrors gt page 39 is found in the Get ting started section Rear view mirror L ____ SS Inside rear view mirror antiglare position Tilt the mirror to the antiglare night posi tion using the lever at its lower edge Automatic antiglare rear view mirror The reflection brightness of the exterior rear view mirror on the driver s side and the inside rear view mirror will respond au tomatically to glare when e the ignition is switched on and e incoming light from headlamps falls on the sensor in the inside rear view mir ror The rear view mirror will not react if e reverse gear is engaged e the interior lighting is turned on Warning A The automatic antiglare function does not react if incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors in the inside rear view mirror The inside rear view mirror and the exterior rear view mirror on the driver s side do not react for example if the rear window sun shade is in raised position Glare can endanger you and others Warning A In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte may escape from the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks Electrolyte has an irritating effect Do not al low the liquid to come into contact with eyes skin clothing or respiratory system In case it does immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary Warning A Exercise care when using t
31. such as better aquaplaning perfor mance To benefit however you must ensure that the tires rotate in the direction specified An arrow on the sidewall indicates the in tended direction of tire rotation Checking tire inflation pressure A Warning If the tire pressure repeatedly drops e check the tires for punctures from for eign objects e check to see whether air is leaking from the valves or from around the rim Regularly check your tire pressure at inter vals of no more than 14 days Correct the tire pressure only when tires are cold Operation Tires and wheels If the tires are warm you should only cor rect the tire pressure if it is too low for cur rent operating conditions A table on the fuel filler flap lists the spec ified tire inflation pressures for warm and cold tires as well as for various operating conditions i The pressures listed for light loads are minimum values offering high driving comfort Increased inflation pressures listed for heavier loads may also be used for light loads These higher pressures produce favorable handling characteristics The ride of the vehicle however will be somewhat harder Never exceed the max values or inflate tires below the min values listed in the fuel filler flap Tire pressure changes by approx 1 5 psi 0 1 bar per 18 F 10 C of air tempera ture change Operation Tires and wheels Keep this in mind when checki
32. tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Warning Technical data Consumer information Temperature The temperature grades are A the high est B and C representing the tire s resis tance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high tem perature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and ex cessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Warning A The temperature grade for this tire is estab lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underin flation or excessive loading either sepa rately or in combination can cause excessive heat build up and possible tire failure ABS Antilock Brake System Prevents the wheels from locking up during braking so that the vehicle can continue to be steered Alignment bolt Metal pin with thread The centering pin is an aid used when changing a tire to align the wheel with the wheel hub BabySmart system This system detects if a special system compatib
33. 123 L Labels identification 318 Lamp bulbs exterior 290 Lamps exterior Front 290 Light sensor 272 Messages in display 272 275 Rear 291 Lamps indicator and warning ABS 257 Airbag Off 61 Battery SmartKey 85 Brakes 258 CHECK ENGINE 259 Coolant 266 Engine diagnostics 257 259 ESP 256 Fuel reserve 259 Instrument cluster 256 259 Seat belts 259 Service indicator 247 SRS 57 Turn signals 23 Language Multifunction display 124 Setting 124 LATCH child seat anchors 69 Folding back 70 Layout of poly V belt drive 319 Leather upholstery Cleaning 253 License plate lamps Messages in display 274 Replacing bulbs 291 295 Light alloy wheels Cleaning 252 Technical data 323 Light sensor 272 Lighter see Cigarette lighter 208 Lighting 101 Automatic headlamp mode 102 Combination switch 104 Daytime running lamp mode _ 103 Door entry lamps 106 Manual headlamp mode 102 Manual operations Exterior lamp switch 101 Front foglamps 103 Locking 51 84 Automatic while driving 91 High beams 104 Centrally from inside 92 Fuel filler flap 287 Instrument cluster illumination 107 Fuel filler flap 233 Interior lighting control 105 Instruments 107 108 Global SmartKey 85 Locking the trunk 90 Interior 105 Separately the trunk 90 Locking the vehicle 286 Locator lighting Low beam 103 101 Manual headlamp mode 102 Vehicle in an emergency 286 Loss of keys 87 Loss of Service and Warranty Sliding pop up roof 289
34. 2 Only on rim 7 2 Jx17 H2 ET 37 C 240 C 240 4MATIC C 320 C 320 4MATIC 7 x 16 H2 7 x 16 H2 1 46 in 37 mm 205 55 R16 91 H 205 55 R16 91 H M S C 230 Kompressor Sport C 320 Sport C 320 4MATIC Sport TA 1 46 in 37 mm 225 45 R17 91 W 205 55 R16 91 H M S Technical data Rims and Tires C 32 AMG 205 50 R17 89 H M S2 or 225 45 R17 91 H M S 2 Technical data Rims and Tires Mixed size tires Front axle Rims light alloy Wheel offset Summer tires radial ply tires Rear axle Rims light alloy Wheel offset Summer tires radial ply tires Also permissible 225 45 ZR17 91 Y 2 Also permissible 245 40 ZR17 91 Y 3 Must not be used with snow chains C 32 AMG Ay Apogee 1 46 in 37 mm 225 45 R17 91 Y 8 o x17H2 1 34 in 34 mm 245 40 R17 91 Y gt 3 Technical data Rims and Tires Spare wheel Your vehicle is equipped with either a spare wheel with full size tire or Minispare wheel Spare wheel with full size tire C 230 Kompressor Sport C 32 AMG C 240 all models C 320 all models Rim light alloy 7 o x 17 H2 Rim steel 7 x 16 H2 Wheel offset 1 46 in 37 mm 1 42 in 36 mm All season tire radial ply tire 205 55 R16 91 H 225 45 R17 91 Y Minispare wheel C 230 Kompressor Sport C 240 all models C 320 all models Rim steel 3 5B x 16 H2 Wheel offset 0 67 in 17 mm All season tire radial ply tire T 125 90 R16 M 98 1 Must not
35. 2 of the ESP switch until the ESP warning lamp in the speedometer goes out You are now again in normal driving mode Safety and Security Driving safety systems Four wheel electronic traction system 4MATIC with the ESP Models with all wheel drive only The 4MATIC improves vehicle s ability to use available traction e g during winter operation in mountains under snowy con ditions by applying power to all four wheels Warning A If you see the ESP warning lamp flash ing in the speedometer dial proceed as fol lows e While driving off apply as little throttle as possible e While driving ease up on the accelerator e Adapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road conditions Failure to observe these guidelines could cause the vehicle to skid The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speed Do not tow with one axle raised Otherwise the transfer case can be damaged which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Performance testing must only be con ducted on a two axle dynamometer Otherwise the transfer case can be damaged which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Because of ESP s automatic operation the engine must be shut off key in starter switch position O or 1 when the parking brake is being tested on a brake test dynamometer Active braking action through ESP may otherwise seriously damage the front or rea
36. 31 control 1 Set current or higher speed gt Step on the brake pedal ri 2 Set current or lower speed 3 Cancel cruise control or Vehicles with manual transmission The set cruise controlled speed is 4 Resume at previously set speed gt Briefly push the cruise control lever to position 3 switched off when declutching exceeds four seconds during downshifting a saving current speed Cruise control will be canceled The gear gt Accelerate or decelerate to the desired last speed set will be stored for later speed use ri gt Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise The last stored speed is canceled when control lever you turn off the engine The current speed is set gt Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Cruise control is activated Setting stored speed Resume function Warning A The speed stored in memory should only be set again if prevailing road conditions per mit Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to preset speed can cause an accident and or serious personal injury to you and others gt Briefly push the cruise control lever to position 4 The cruise control will resume the last previously set speed gt Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Setting a higher speed gt Lift the cruise control lever to position 1 and hold it up until the de sired speed is reached gt Release the cruise control lever The new speed
37. If a proper oil level check cannot be per formed the following message will appear MEASURING NOT POSSIBLE gt Repeat the engine oil level check after a short while See Practical hints gt page 270 if an en gine oil level indicator appears on the dis play when the engine is running More information on engine oil can be found in the Technical data section gt page 332 Transmission fluid level The transmission fluid level does not need to be checked If you notice transmission fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions have an authorized Mercedes Benz Center check the transmission Coolant level The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion antifreeze To check the coolant level the vehicle must be parked on level ground and the engine must be cool The coolant expansion tank is located on the passenger side of the engine compart ment Operation Engine compartment The coolant level is correct if the level Warning A In order to avoid any possibly serious burns e for cold coolant reaches the black top part of the reservoir e for warm coolant is approx 0 6 in 1 5 cm higher gt Add coolant as required e Use extreme caution when opening the hood if there are any signs of steam or coolant leaking from the cooling system or if the coolant temperature gauge indi cates that the coolant is overheated gt Replace and tighten cap e Do not remove pre
38. Internet using the ID and password sent to you shortly after the completion of your Acquaintance Call The Response Center will then unlock your vehicle with the remote door unlocking feature The remote door unlock feature is avail able if the relevant cellular phone net work is available The SOS button will flash and the mes sage EMERGENCY CALL CALL CONNECTED will appear in the mul tifunction display to indicate receipt of the door unlock command Once the vehicle is unlocked a Re sponse Center specialist will attempt to establish voice contact with the ve hicle occupants If the trunk recessed handle was pulled for more than 20 seconds before door unlock authorization was received by the Response Center you must wait 15 minutes before pulling the trunk recessed handle again Stolen vehicle tracking services In the event your vehicle was stolen gt Report the incident to the police The police will issue a numbered inci dent report gt Pass this number on to the Mercedes Benz Response Center along with your password issued to you when you subscribed to the service The Response Center will then attempt to covertly contact the vehicle s Tele Aid system Once the vehicle is lo cated the Response Center will con tact the local law enforcement and you The vehicle s location will only be pro vided to law enforcement Controls in detail Useful features Garage door opener T
39. The frequency is stored on the se lected station button e Retrieving a station from memory gt Press the desired station button 1 to 0 Storing stations automatically Autostore The Autostore memory function provides an additional memory level The station memory for manually stored stations is not erased Controls in detail Audio system Calling up the Autostore memory level gt Briefly press the AS key AS appears on the display in inversed color format The radio finds the ten stations with the strongest signals These sta tions are stored on the station buttons 1 to 0 in the order of signal strength Retrieving a station from memory gt Press the desired station button 1 to 0 Leaving the Autostore memory level gt Press the AS key AS appears on the display in in versed color format Controls in detail Audio system Weather band gt Press the WB key The last weather band station is tuned in gt Select the desired weather band sta tion with buttons 1 to 7 If a station cannot be tuned in a scan is automatically started gt Press the EXE or EE button The next receivable weather band station is tuned in Cassette mode Playing cassettes gt Press the button The display folds down and the cas sette slot becomes visible gt Press the cassette into the slot until it engages and tap it gently The cassette will be pulled in automati cally
40. The system switches to cassette mode TAPE Track 1 will be played and SIDE 1 appears in the display Track 1 is the side of the cassette which is fac ing upward The cassette deck will au tomatically detect the type of tape gt Fold the display back up and press gen tly on the display frame to lock in place e Do not press directly on the display face or gt Ifa cassette is already in the mecha nism press the button i A warning signal will sound after 20 seconds if the display is left in the down position If the display is not closed a warning signal will sound and the radio will be muted Track selection TAFE SIDE 1 TRE HE AUD S gt Press the TRK key Upon selection of the track the display shows SIDE 1 or SIDE 2 correspond ingly gt You can switch track sides at any time The track side will be changed auto matically at the end of the tape Cassette eject gt Press the eject button FE The display will fold down and the cas sette will be ejected The system will switch back to radio mode automatical ly Fold the display back up i The cassette will not be ejected when the system is switched off or switched to another operating mode Track search Track search forward TAFE SEEK FWO TRE HE AUD Se gt Press the IXE button SEEK FWD will appear in the display The track search will run the tape forward to the start of the next track and switch to play
41. When you lock your vehicle the tow away alarm is automatically armed after about 30 seconds When you unlock your vehicle the tow away protection disarms automatically Disarming tow away alarm To prevent triggering the tow away alarm feature switch off the tow away alarm be fore towing the vehicle or when parking on a surface subject to movement such as a ferry or auto train The switch is located on the center con sole lt SEN A 1 Tow away alarm off switch 2 Indicator lamp gt Turn off the ignition and remove the key You cannot disarm the tow away alarm if the ignition is turned on Safety and Security Anti theft systems gt Press upper half 1 of the switch Indicator lamp 2 in the switch lights up briefly The tow away alarm remains disarmed un til you lock your vehicle again Canceling the alarm gt Insert the key in the starter switch or gt Press the or button on the key Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Seats Memory function Lighting Instrument cluster Control system Manual transmission Automatic transmission Good visibility Climate control Automatic climate control Audio system Power windows Sliding pop up roof Driving systems Loading Useful features Controls in detail Locking and unlocking In the Controls in detail section you will find detailed information on how to oper ate the equipment installed on your v
42. and add oil as required gt If you must add engine oil frequently have the engine checked for possible leaks There is water in the oil gt Have the oil checked The measuring system is malfunctioning Have the measuring system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center The engine oil level warnings should not be ignored Extended driving with the symbol displayed could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Practical hints What to do if Display H OH BG RESERVE FUEL VISIT FILLING STATION DOOR OPE HOOD OPE TRUNK OPEN EPLACE KEY ISIT WORKSHOP R V AUTOM LIGHT ON REMOVE KEY LAMP SENSOR VISIT WORKSHOP LOW BEAM L CHECK LAMPS LOW BEAM R CHECK LAMPS DISPLAY DEFECTIVE VISIT WORKSHOP Possible cause The fuel level has dropped below the reserve mark You are attempting to drive with one or more doors open You are driving with the hood open This message will appear whenever the trunk lid is open No additional code available for SmartKey You have forgotten to remove the key The lamp sensor is malfunctioning The headlamps switch on automatically The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning The right low beam lamp is malfunctioning The display for the lamps or the system is malfunctioning Suggested solution gt Refuel at the next gas station gt page 233 gt Close t
43. be possible with all telephone networks or if certain net work services and or telephone functions are active Check with your local network operation company It may take some time to set up an emergency call To use this function you must ensure that the number stored in memory location 1 is the number to be dialed in case of emer gency aie ROAN j i SHO If an emergency call cannot be connected the message SYSTM BUSY appears Controls in detail Audio system Accepting an incoming call Accepting an incoming call in telephone mode With an incoming call a ringing tone can be heard and the caller s telephone num ber or the name under which this tele phone number has been saved in the telephone book appear on the display If the caller s number is not transmitted CALL will appear in the display gt Press the SND key to accept the call Accepting an incoming call in cassette CD or radio mode If the telephone is activated in the back ground receiving symbol S visible on dis play the audio source is muted when a call is received The ringing tone is heard and the caller s telephone number or the name under which this telephone number has been saved in the telephone book ap pear on the display If the callers number is not transmitted CALL appears in the display gt Press the SND key to accept the call Muting a call It is possible to silence a call the caller is the
44. be used with snow chains Technical data Electrical system Electrical system Generator alternator Starter motor Battery Spark plugs Electrode gap Tightening torque C 230 Kompressor Sport 14 V 120 A 12 V 1 1 kW 12 V 100 Ah Bosch F 6 MPP 332 0 031 in 0 8 mm 18 22 ft lb 25 30 Nm C 240 C 320 all models C 32 AMG 14V 120A 14V 120A 12 V 1 7 kW 12 V 1 7 kW 12 V 100 Ah 12 V 100 Ah Bosch F 8 DPP332 NGK IFR 6 D 10 NGK PFR 5 R 11 0 039 in 1 0 mm 0 039 in 1 0 mm 15 22 ft lb 20 30 Nm 15 22 ft lb 20 30 Nm Main dimensions Overall vehicle length Overall vehicle width Overall vehicle height Wheelbase Track front Track rear C 230 Kompressor Sport C 240 C 320 C 320 Sport 178 2 in 4526 mm 178 2 in 4526 mm 68 0 in 1728 mm 68 0 in 1728 mm 56 4 in 1433 mm 56 3 in 1429 mm 106 9 in 2715 mm 106 9 in 2715 mm 58 8 in 1493 mm 58 8 in 1493 mm 57 6 in 1464 mm 57 6 in 1464 mm Technical data C 240 4MATIC C 320 4MATIC C 320 4MATIC Sport 178 2 in 4526 mm 68 0 in 1728 mm 56 0 in 1422 mm 106 9 in 2715 mm 58 8 in 1493 mm 57 6 in 1464 mm Main dimensions C 32 AMG 178 2 in 4526 mm 68 0 in 1728 mm 56 1 in 1426 mm 106 9 in 2715 mm 58 8 in 1493 mm 58 0 in 1474 mm Technical data Weights Weights Roof load max Trunk load max 220 Ib 100 kg 220 Ib 100 kg Fuels coolants lubricants etc Capac
45. can cause an accident and or serious personal injury Safety and Security Panic alarm Panic alarm An audible alarm and blinking exterior Activating i lamps will operate for approximately F er 1 j or operation in the USA only 2 2 minutes d i hold button Tiioratleast ne This device complies with Part 15 of i the FCC Rules Operation is subject to he followi itions Deactivating the following two conditions TEENS 1 This device may not cause harmful gt Press button 1 again interference and or 2 this device must accept any inter gt Insert key in starter switch ference received including interfer ence that may cause undesired operation P80 35 2088 31 Any unauthorized modification to this 1 A nen device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Canada only Only vehicles equipped with an anti theft alarm system have SmartKeys with integrated panic button 1 Driving safety systems In this section you will find information on the following driving safety systems e ABS Antilock Brake System e BAS Brake Assist System e ESP Electronic Stability Program e 4AMATIC Four Wheel Electronic Trac tion System e In winter operation the maximum ef fectiveness of the ABS ESP and 4MATIC is only achieved with winter tires M S tires or snow chains as re quired Warning A The following factors increase the risk of ac cidents e Excessive speed
46. control Ventilated storage compartment Opening the air vent Rear passenger compartment adjust able air vents gt Raise lever 1 The front center console storage compart ment has its own air vent that allows for f Pa _ Closing the air vent cooling ventilation when the automatic cli mate control system is activated gt Lower lever 1 p gt F si i You should keep this air vent closed The compartment can get very warm when outside temperatures are low due to its confined space When storing heat sensitive objects in the compart ment close the air vent while heating the passenger compartment O 1 Center air vent left T 2 Thumbwheel for air volume control for center air vents 3 Center air vent right Do not obstruct the air vent in the storage compartment To open center air vents gt Turn thumbwheel 2 upward e The temperature at the air vents for the rear passenger compartment 1 and 3 is the same as at the dashboard center air vents 1 Lever Controls in detail Automatic climate control Automatic climate control P83 40 2572 31 Item 1 Air volume control for left center air vent Left center air vent adjustable Thumbwheel for adding outside air Right center air vent adjustable a A WN Air volume control for right center air vent Air volume control for side air vent Side air vent adjustable Side defroster vent fixed o ON OB Automa
47. coolant level is low water and MB 325 0 anticorrosion antifreeze should be used to bring it up to the proper level have cooling system checked for signs of leakage Please make sure that the mix ture is in accordance with label instruc tions The water in the cooling system must meet minimum requirements which are usually satisfied by normal drinking water If you are not sure about the water quality con sult your authorized Mercedes Benz Center Anticorrosion antifreeze Your vehicle contains a number of alumi num parts The use of aluminum compo nents in motor vehicle engines necessitates that anticorrosion antifreeze coolant used in such engines be specifical ly formulated to protect the aluminum parts Anticorrosion antifreeze quantity Model C 230 Kompressor Sport C 240 C 320 all models C 32 AMG Failure to use such anticorrosion anti freeze coolant will result in a significantly shortened service life Therefore the following product is strongly recommended for use in your vehicle Mercedes Benz 325 0 Anticorrosion Anti freeze Agent Approx freeze protection 35 F 37 C 4 2 US qt 4 0 I 4 8 US qt 4 5 I 7 7 US qt 7 3 I 49 F 45 C 4 7 US qt 4 41 5 3 US qt 5 0 I 8 5 US qt 8 0 I Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Before the start of the winter season or once a year in hot southern regions you should have the anticorrosion antifreeze concentration
48. damaged or rusted Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired immediately Do not continue to drive under these circumstances Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call Roadside Assistance Incorrect mounting bolts or improperly tightened mounting bolts can cause the wheel to come off This could cause an accident Be sure to use the correct mount ing bolts Warning A Use only genuine equipment Mercedes Benz wheel bolts They are identi fied by the Mercedes star Other wheel bolts may come loose Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the vehicle is raised Otherwise the vehicle could tip over gt Unscrew the alignment bolt install last wheel bolt and tighten slightly Minispare wheel Warning A The dimensions of the Minispare wheel are different from those of the road wheels As a result the vehicle handling characteristics change when driving with a Minispare wheel mounted The spare wheel should only be used temporarily and replaced with a regular road wheel as quick as possible In the case of a flat tire you may temporarily use the Minispare wheel when observing the following restrictions e Donot exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph 80 km h e Drive to the nearest tire repair facility to have the flat tire repaired or replaced as appropriate e Do not operate vehicle with more than one spare wheel mounted Lowering the vehicle gt Lo
49. dash board e Keep hands on the outside of steering wheel rim Placing hands and arms in side the rim can increase the risk and potential severity of hand arm injury when driver front airbag inflates e Adjust the front passenger seat as far as possible rearward from the dashboard when the seat is occupied e Occupants especially children should never lean their heads in the area of the door where the side airbag inflates This could result in serious injuries or death should the airbag be triggered Always sit upright properly use the seat belts and appropriate size infant or child re straint system e Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat except in a Mercedes Benz authorized BabySmart compatible child seat which operates with the BabySmart system installed in the vehicle to deacti vate the passenger side front airbag when it is properly installed Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash If this happens seri ous or fatal injury will result Failure to follow these instructions can re sult in severe injuries to you or other occu pants If you sell your vehicle you are responsible to make the buyer aware of these points Be sure to give the buyer this Operator s Manu al Warning A Accident research shows that the safest place for children in an automobile is in the rear seat Should you choose to place a child 12 years old or under in t
50. data All important technical data for your vehi cle can be found in this section E Indexes The glossary provides explanations of the most important technical terms The table of contents and the index are de signed to help you find information quickly and easily The following publications are part of your vehicle documentation e this Operator s Manual e the Service Booklet Separate operating instructions will be provided as required depending on the equipment options installed in your vehi cle Introduction Symbols Symbols The following symbols are found in this gt This symbol points to instructions for Operator s Manual Warning A you to follow Optional equipment is identified with an asterisk Since standard equipment varies between models the descriptions and illustrations in this manual may differ slightly from gt A number of these symbols appearing in succession indicates a multiple step procedure Warning notices draw your attention to haz ards that may endanger your health or life or the health or life of others gt Page This symbol tells you where to look for further information on a the actual equipment of your vehi T iope cle Highlights hazards that may result in damage to your vehicle b gt This continuation symbol marks an interrupted procedure which ri will be continued on the next Helpful hints or further information you kaps may find useful gt In
51. driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of approximately 44 feet approximately 13 5 m every second Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built in or attached antenna i e with out being connected to an external antenna from inside the vehicle while the engine is running Doing so could lead to a malfunc tion of the vehicle s electronic system possibly resulting in an accident and personal injury You can use the functions in the TEL menu to operate your telephone provided it is connected to a hands free system and switched on gt Switch on the telephone and COMAND gt Press button or on the steering wheel repeatedly until you see the TEL menu in the display Which messages will appear in the display field depends on whether your telephone is switched on or off e If the telephone is off the message in the multifunction display is TEL OFF e If the telephone is on The telephone will then search for a network During this time the display is empty As soon as the telephone has found a network READY is indicated in the display Me c TEL sg READY 72 F 10 30a P54 32 2125 31 1 Signal strength Controls in detail Control system This standby message indicates that your Answering a call Dialing a number from the phone book
52. even fatal ac cident is sharply increased when you drink or take drugs and drive Please don t drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive after drinking or taking drugs Keep driver s foot area clear at all times Ob jects stored in this area may impair pedal movement Operation Driving instructions Power assistance A When the engine is not running the brake and steering systems are without power as sistance Under these circumstances a much greater effort is necessary to stop or steer the vehicle Warning Brakes A After driving in heavy rain for some time without applying the brakes or through wa ter deep enough to wet brake components the first braking action may be somewhat reduced and increased pedal pressure may be necessary to obtain expected braking ef fect Maintain a safe distance from vehicles in front Warning Resting your foot on the brake pedal will cause excessive and premature wear of the brake pads It can also result in the brakes overheating thereby significantly reducing their effec tiveness It may not be possible to stop the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an acci dent To help prevent brake disk corrosion after driving on wet road surfaces particularly salted roads it is advisable to brake the vehicle with considerable force prior to parking The heat generated serves to dry the brakes If your brake system is normally only subje
53. for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle For further information you can find us on the Mercedes Benz web site www mbusa com or www mercedes benz ca Warning A To help avoid personal injury be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs Improper or incomplete service or the use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment which may in turn result in personal injury If you have any question about carrying out some service turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes Benz Center We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator s Manual Reprinting translation and copying even of excerpts is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing Title illustration no P00 01 2283 31 Press time 10 24 02 GSP SIP Printed in Germany
54. gallons 12 liters to the fuel may improve the engine behavior Cold weather performance It is possible that starting times will signif icantly increase at temperatures below 32 F 0 C At low temperatures the use of a block heater is recommended see your authorized Mercedes Benz Center for further information Rough idling may also be experienced at such temperatures before the engine is fully warmed up E85 fuel is unsuitable for use when am bient temperatures fall below 14 F 10 C Hot weather performance At ambient temperatures above 95 F 35 C start times may increase and be accompanied by a rough idle following the start Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Cruising range E85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than gasoline To ensure that engine per formance with Ethanol fuel is similar to that when using gasoline the engine must burn more Ethanol fuel As a result it is to be expected that the fuel consumption will increase when using E85 compared to gas oline operation i Use of E85 may reduce your driving range Maintenance Please inform your Mercedes Benz Center if you use or have used E85 fuel when your vehicle is delivered for maintenance or repairs Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Coolants The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion antifreeze which pro vides e Corrosion protection e Freeze p
55. handling automotive batteries gt page 240 gt Start the engine of the disabled vehi cle gt Now you can again turn on the electrical em Post consumers Do not turn on the lights under 1 Positive terminal of charged battery any circumstances The battery is located in the engine compartment on the right hand side The 2 Positi Warhoodtennnetint f terminals for jump starting are located in pee en ey rontof Remove the jumper cables first from front of the battery discharged battery negative terminals 3 and 4 and then 3 Negative terminal of charged battery from positive terminals 1 and 2 gt Make sure that the two vehicles donot 4 Negative under hood terminal in front touch of discharged battery gt Have the battery checked at the near est authorized Mercedes Benz Center gt Turn off all electrical consumers gt Connect positive terminal 1 of the gt Apply parking brake charged battery with the under hood Bw terminal 2 in front of the discharged Vehicles with automatic transmission gt Shift selector lever to position P man battery with the jumper cables Clam me ae N y Jump p and or 4MATIC ual transmission to Neutral cable to charged battery 1 first Do not tow start the vehicle gt Start engine of the vehicle with the charged battery and run at idle speed Practical hints Towing the vehicle Towing the vehicle Mercedes Benz recommends that the vehicle be transported with al
56. highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked Use only belts in stalled or supplied by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Airbags and ETDs are designed to func tion on a one time only basis An airbag Safety and Security Occupant safety or emergency tensioning device ETD that was activated must be replaced No modifications of any kind may be made to any components or wiring of the SRS This includes changing or re moving any component or part of the SRS the installation of additional trim material badges etc over the steering wheel hub front passenger airbag cov er door trim panels or door frame trims and installation of additional elec trical electronic equipment on or near SRS components and wiring Keep area between airbags and occupants free from objects e g packages purses umbrellas etc Do not pass belts over sharp edges They could tear Do not make any modification that could change the effectiveness of the belts Do not hang items such as coat hangers from the coat hooks or handles over the door These items may turn into projec tiles and cause head and other injuries when curtain airbag is deployed An airbag system component within the steering wheel gets hot after the airbag has inflated Do not touch Improper work on the system including incorrect installation and removal can lead to possible injury through an unin tend
57. i The doors unlock automatically after an accident if the force of the impact ex ceeds a preset threshold The vehicle automatically locks when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph 15 km h or more You could therefore lock yourself out when the vehicle e is pushed e is on a test stand You can deactivate the automatic locking using the control system gt page 129 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Locking and unlocking from the inside The switch is located in the center console Unlocking gt Press lower half 2 of the central lock ing switch You can lock or unlock the doors and the trunk from inside using the central locking switch This can be useful for example if you want to lock the vehicle before starting to drive The vehicle unlocks i You can open a locked door from the inside Open door only when conditions are safe to do so The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or un locked with the central locking switch If the vehicle was previously centrally I Warning A Central locking switch locked using the SmartKey it will not unlock using the central locking switch When leaving the vehicle always remove the 1 Locking key from the starter switch take it with you 2 Unlocking If the vehicle was previously locked and lock the vehicle Do not leave children tadi with the central locking switch F F oc
58. improve the vehi cle s traction Please observe the following guidelines when using snow chains Use of snow chains is not permissible with all wheel tire combinations Chains should only be used on the rear wheels Follow the manufacturer s mounting instructions Use only snow chains that are ap proved by Mercedes Benz Your autho rized Mercedes Benz Center will be glad to advise you on this subject Even on vehicles with all wheel drive use snow chains on rear tires only Use of snow chains is not permissible with tire sizes e 225 45 R17 91 H M S e 225 45 R17 91 W e 245 40 R17 91Y e 1125 90 R16M 98 Maintenance We strongly recommend that you have your vehicle serviced by your authorized Mercedes Benz Center in accordance with the Service Booklet at the times called for by the FSS Flexible Service System Failure to have the vehicle maintained in accordance with the Service Booklet at the designated times mileage called for by the FSS may result in vehicle damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty FSS will notify you when your next service is due Approximately one month before your next service is due one of the following mes sages will appear in the multifunction dis play while you are driving or when you switch on the ignition example service A SERVICE A IN XX DAYS SERVICE A IN XX MILES KM SERVICE A DUE NOW The type of service due is indicated in the speedometer
59. injury or death Never lean over batteries while connecting you might get injured Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes skin or clothing In case it does immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary A battery will also produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep flames or sparks away from battery avoid improper connection of jumper cables smoking etc Practical hints Battery H Never loosen or detach battery termi nal clamps while the engine is running or the key is in the starter switch Oth erwise the alternator and other elec tronic components could be severely damaged Have the battery checked regularly by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Refer to Service Booklet for mainte nance intervals or contact your autho rized Mercedes Benz Center for further information Warning A Do not place metal objects on the battery as this could result in a short circuit Use leak proof battery only to avoid the risk of acid burns in the event of an accident Practical hints Battery Warning A With a disconnected battery e you will no longer be able to turn the key in the starter switch will have no effect e the selector lever will remain locked in position P biS a 1 Negative terminal 2 Positive terminal cover Disconnecting the battery Charging and reinstalling the battery
60. is set i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not deactivate cruise control After brief acceleration e g for passing cruise control will resume the last speed set Setting a lower speed gt Depress the cruise control lever to position 2 and hold it down until the desired speed is reached gt Release the cruise control lever The new speed is set Controls in detail Driving systems i Vehicles with automatic transmission When you use the cruise control lever to decelerate the transmission will au tomatically downshift if the engine s braking power does not brake the vehi cle sufficiently Fine adjustment in 1 mph 1 km h increments Faster gt Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 1 Slower gt Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 2 Controls in detail Loading Loading Roof rack it Be sure to stack a load on the roof rack E A so that the vehicle cannot be damaged Warning while driving Use only those roof racks approved by Make sure that Mercedes Benz for your vehicle model to e you can fully raise the avoid damage to the vehicle Follow manu sliding pop up roof facturer s installation instructions e you can fully open the trunk Only mount the approved roof rack to the fastening bolts see arrows located under the door weatherstrips Ski sack a Unfolding and loading gt Fold armrest do
61. it will revert to the start of that track If it has been playing for less than ten seconds it will revert to the preceding track Repeated pressing of the BS or HG button will result in multiple tracks being skipped i The relative time of the track is shown on the display during search the desired location has been reached the desired location has been reached Scanning Starting scan gt Press the button SC appears in the display Each track on the current CD will be played for approx eight seconds in ascending order Ending scan gt Press the Ret EN EA EI or EGE button Random play The random play function RDM plays the tracks on the current CD in random order Switching on random play Col TRACE 16 ROM RFT AUO T gt Press the RDM key RDM appears on the display in in versed color format Switching off random play gt Press the RDM key again The inversed color RDM display disap pears Repeat The repeat function RPT repeats the cur rent track Switching on repeat CO1 TRACK i FOM RFT AUD T gt Press the RPT key RPT appears on the display in in versed color format Switching off repeat gt Press the RPT key again The inversed color RPT display disap pears i The Random play and Repeat function cannot be used simultaneously Controls in detail Audio system Track and time display CoS Tai 7 G2 46 ROM EFT AUD T
62. left mirror or i button 3 for the right mirror With the memory function gt Push adjustment button 2 up down gt page 98 youcan store exterior rear left or right according to the setting de view mirror positions together with sired settings for the seats and the steering wheel H If an exterior rear view mirror housing More information can be found in the is forcibly pushed forward or backward Controls in detail section gt page 144 reposition it by applying firm pressure until it snaps into place The mirror housing is now properly positioned and you can adjust the mirror normally Driving Warning A Do not lay any objects in the driver s foot well Be careful that floor mats or carpets in the driver s footwell have sufficient clear ance for the pedals During sudden driving or braking maneuvers the objects could get caught between the pedals You could then no longer brake or accelerate Fastening the seat belt Warning A Always fasten your seat belt before driving off Always make sure your passengers are properly restrained even those sitting in the rear and pregnant women Failure to wear and properly fasten and po sition your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident You and your passenger should al ways wear seat belts If you are ever in an accident your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt
63. lights up gt If one indicator lamp is on press upper Both switches for the front seats are locat re switch position 1 ed in the center console Switching on rapid seat heating p itch position 2 gt If both indicator lamps are on press gt Press lower switch position 2 lower switch position 2 Both red indicator lamps on the switch light up The seat heater will be automatically m switched off after approximately If one or both of the lamps on the seat 30 minutes heater switch are blinking there is in sufficient voltage available since too many electrical consumers are turned on The seat heater switches off auto matically 1 Normal heating 2 Rapid heating The seat heater will switch back on again automatically as soon as suffi cient voltage is available gt Make sure that the ignition is switched on All the lamps in the instrument cluster light up i Switching on seat heating The system switches over to normal heating mode after approximately five minutes Only one indicator lamp re mains lit gt Press upper switch position 1 Controls in detail Memory function Memory function T You can store up to three different settings Prior to operating the vehicle the driv Per key Warning A er should check and adjust the seat The following settings are saved for each height seat position fore and aft and stored position seat backrest angle if necessary to ensure a
64. lit indi cating that the system is not functioning Installation of infant and child restraint systems This vehicle is equipped with tether an chorages for a top tether strap at each of the rear seating positions t OL 1 Cover of top anchorage ring P91 40 2346 31 gt Make sure that the rear backrest is locked in its upright position gt page 200 gt gt A Always lock backrest in its upright position when rear seat bench is occupied by pas sengers or the extended cargo area is not in use Check for secure locking by pushing and pulling on the backrest Warning Remove cover 1 from anchorage ring 3 Guide tether strap between head restraint and top of seat back Head restraint must be installed if removable and positioned such that the top tether strap can pass freely between the head restraint and top of seat back Make sure that the tether strap is not twisted gt D Safety and Security Occupant safety Child seat anchors LATCH type This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren type anchors at each of the outer rear seats for the installation of a LATCH child seat with the matching mounting fittings 2 If a child seat is not installed the LATCH P91 40 2376 31 anchors can be folded back between the P91 12 2453 31 2 Hook seat cushion and the backrest 1 Anchors 3 Anchorage ring 2 Button gt Securel
65. microphone 27 Miles kilometers in speedometer Setting 123 Minispare wheel 300 Bolts 284 Removing 283 Mirrors Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position 145 Adjusting 39 Automatic antiglare for inside mirror 144 Automatic antiglare for rear view mirror 144 Exterior rear view mirror 39 Exterior rear view mirror parking positions 131 Inside rear view mirror 39 Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position 100 MON Motor Octane Number 234 343 Mph or km h in speedometer 123 Multicontour seat 96 Multifunction display 111 343 Selecting language 124 Standard display 115 Multifunction display messages ABS 262 BAS 263 Battery 278 Brake fluid 265 Brake pads 265 Check engine 259 Coolant 267 Coolant level 266 Display 278 Doors 272 Engine 259 Engine oillevel 270 ESP 269 Fuel reserve tank 272 Hood 272 Key 272 Lamps 272 275 Parking brake 264 Steering column not properly locked 276 Steering gear oillevel 276 Tele Aid 277 Telephone 277 Trunk lid 272 Washer fluid 278 Multifunction steering wheel 24 112 343 Buttons 112 N Navigation system See separate COMAND operating instructions Navigation system Operating 118 Night security illumination 103 Setting 126 o Occupant safety 56 Airbags 57 Children and airbags 58 Children in the vehicle 65 Fastening the seat belt 41 Infant and child restraint systems 65 LATCH child seat anchors 69 Seat belts 41 59 Odometer main 23 Oil
66. natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that af forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following an other vehicle too closely or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ESP The Electronic Stability Program ESP monitors the vehicle s traction force of adhesive friction between the tires and the road surface and handling The ESP recognizes when a wheel is spin ning or if the vehicle starts to skid By ap plying brakes to the appropriate wheel and by limiting engine output the ESP works to stabilize the vehicle The ESP is especially useful while driving off and on wet or slip pery road surfaces The ESP warning lamp in the speed ometer dial flashes when the ESP is en gaged The ESP warning lamp in the speed ometer dial lights up when you turn the key in the starter switch to position 2 It goes out when the engine is running Safety and Security Driving safety systems Warning A Never switch off the ESP when you see the ESP warning lamp flashing in the speedometer dial In this case proceed as follows e While driv
67. of passenger cars un der Title 49 Code of U S Federal Regula tions Part 575 pursuant to the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966 Uniform tire quality grading Quality grades can be found where appli cable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Traction Tread wear Temperature 200 AA A All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Tread Wear The tread wear grade is a comparative rat ing based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For ex ample a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Technical data Consumer information Traction The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades repre sent the tire s ability to stop on wet pave ment as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance A The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction
68. of the head restraint cushion More information can be found in the Controls in detail section gt page 93 Power seat gt Turn the key in the starter switch to position 1or2 or gt Open the driver s or front passenger door The seat adjustment switches are located in each front door P54 25 2949 31 1 Head restraint height 2 Seat height 3 Seat cushion tilt 4 Seat fore and aft adjustment 5 Backrest tilt Seat fore and aft adjustment gt Press the switch forward or backward in the direction of arrow 4 Adjust to a comfortable seating posi tion that still allows you to reach the accelerator brake pedal safely The position should be as far rearward as possible consistent with ability to properly operate controls i When moving the seat be sure that there are no items in the footwell or be hind the seat Otherwise you could damage the seat With the memory function gt page 98 you can store seat positions together with settings for the steering wheel and the exterior rear view mirrors Seat height gt Press the switch up or down in the di rection of arrow 2 Seat cushion tilt gt Press the switch up or down in the di rection of arrow 3 until your upper legs are lightly supported Backrest tilt gt Press the switch forward or back in direction of arrow 5 until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steer ing wheel Head restraint height g
69. on Controls in detail Climate control Deactivating the climate control system Deactivating gt Set the air volume control gt page 149 to position 0 Reactivating gt Set the air volume control gt page 149 to any speed Controls in detail Climate control Air conditioning The air conditioning is operational while the engine is running and cools the interior air to the temperature set by the operator i Condensation may drip out from under neath the vehicle This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction Deactivating It is possible to deactivate the air condi tioning cooling function of the climate control system The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified gt Press button ACOFF gt page 149 The indicator lamp on the button ACOFF lights up Activating Moist air can fog up the windows You can dehumidify the air with the air condition ing gt Press ACOFF again gt page 149 The indicator lamp on the button ACOFF goes out The air conditioning uses the refrigerant R134a This refrigerant is free of CFC s which are harmful to the ozone layer If the air conditioning cannot be turned on again this indicates that the air con ditioning is losing refrigerant The com pressor has turned itself off Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Controls in detail Climate
70. or icy roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt acceleration braking and steering maneuvers Do not use the cruise control system under such conditions When the vehicle is in danger of skidding move selector lever to position N or in case of manual transmission declutch Try to keep the vehicle under control by cor rective steering action i Information on driving with snow chains see Snow chains gt page 246 Warning A On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi cle control Your vehicle s ABS will not pre vent this type of control loss Road salts and chemicals can adversely af fect braking efficiency Increased pedal force may become necessary to produce the normal braking effect We therefore recommend depressing the brake pedal periodically when traveling at length on salt strewn roads This can bring road salt impaired braking efficiency back to normal Be very careful that you carry out these braking maneu vers without endangering any other road users If the vehicle is parked after being driven on salt treated roads the braking efficien cy should be tested as soon as possible af ter driving is resumed while observing the safety rules in the previous paragraph A If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow make sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe and from around the vehicle with
71. prevent interfer ence during playback Avoid fingerprints and dust on CDs Do not write on CDs or apply any label or other material to them Use only original CDs Using copied CDs may create problems during playback Clean CDs from time to time with a com mercially available cleaning cloth No sol vents anti static sprays etc should be used for cleaning Replace the CD in its case after use Protect CDs from heat and direct sunlight ice DIGITAL AUDIO Only use CDs which bear the label shown and that conform to the compact disc dig ital audio standard IEC 60908 Use of CDs which do not meet this stan dard may cause damage to the CD chang er Do not play single CDs 80 mm with an adapter A The CD changer is a Class 1 laser product There is a danger of invisible laser radiation if the cover is opened or damaged Do not remove the cover The CD changer does not contain any parts which can be ser viced by the user For safety reasons have any service work which may be necessary performed only by qualified personnel Warning Operational readiness of CD changer If a CD changer has been installed in the system it can be operated from the front control panel of the radio A loaded maga zine must be installed for CD playing Loading unloading the CD magazine gt Slide the changer door to the right and press the eject button A gt The magazine will be ejected b gt Controls in detail
72. resulting in unconsciousness and death e To prevent unauthorized persons from access to the trunk always close the cover Controls in detail Loading Split rear bench seat The two sections can be folded down sep arately to enlarge the cargo area Warning A When expanding the luggage area always fold the seat cushions fully forward Unless you are transporting cargo the back rests must remain properly locked in the up right position In an accident during hard braking or sud den maneuvers loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle Controls in detail Loading Folding the backrest forward The release handle 1 is located in the trunk Pull release handle 2 on the left or lt e right backrest as required gt Fold the backrest 4 rearward until it engages Fold seat cushion 3 forward gt Fold the seat cushions 3 rearward until they lock into position gt Pull release handle 1 Fold backrest 4 forward gt Retract head restraints fully and fold rearward gt page 36 bb P91 12 2417 31 If the backrest is not locked into position a red indicator 5 will be visible gt Check for secure locking by pushing and pulling on the backrest Warning A If a red indicator is visible with the backrest up then the backrest is not properly locked into positi
73. second Release transmit button to interrupt procedure gt ing the vehicle The windows and sliding pop up roof begin to close after approximately one second Release transmit button to interrupt procedure Ensure that all side windows and the slid ing pop up roof are properly closed before leaving the vehicle synchronized each time after the battery has been disconnect ed the sliding pop up roof has been closed manually gt page 289 or the sliding pop up roof does not open smoothly or malfunctions Synchronizing gt gt Turn the key in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 Press the switch in the raise direction until the sliding pop up roof is fully raised at the rear gt page 190 Hold the switch for approximately one second Driving systems The cruise control driving system of your vehicle is described on the following pag es The BAS ABS and ESP driving systems are described in the Safety and Security sec tion gt page 73 Cruise control Cruise control automatically maintains the speed you set for your vehicle Use of cruise control is recommended for driving at a constant speed for extended periods of time You can set any speed over 20 mph 30 km h The cruise control function is operated by means of the cruise control lever The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever found on the left hand side of the steering column gt page 24
74. section of this manual gt page 22 The instrument cluster is activated when you e open a door e turn on the ignition e press the reset knob gt page 22 e switch on the exterior lamps You can change the instrument cluster set tings in the Instrument cluster submenu of the control system gt page 122 Instrument cluster illumination Use the reset knob gt page 22 to adjust the illumination brightness for the instru ment cluster i The instrument cluster illumination is dimmed or brightened automatically to suit ambient light conditions The instrument cluster illumination will also be adjusted automatically when you switch on the vehicle s exterior lamps Controls in detail Instrument cluster To brighten illumination gt Turn the reset knob in the instrument cluster clockwise gt page 22 The instrument cluster illumination will brighten To dim illumination gt Turn the reset knob in the instrument cluster counterclockwise gt page 22 The instrument cluster illumination will dim Controls in detail Instrument cluster Coolant temperature display Warning A e Driving when your engine is badly over heated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine com partment to catch fire You could be se riously burned e Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the engine hood Stay away from the eng
75. secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Warning A Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest reclined Sitting in an excessively reclined position can be dangerous You could slide under the seat belt in a collision If you slide under it the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck That could cause serious or even fatal injuries The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best re straint when the wearer is in an upright po sition and the belt is properly positioned on the body Warning A Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly re strained with a separate seat belt even those in the rear Warning A Read and observe the additional warning no tices printed in the Safety and Security section gt page 61 F 1 Latch plate 2 Buckle 3 Release button gt With a smooth motion pull the belt from the belt outlet Place the belt over your shoulder Push latch plate 1 into buckle 2 until it clicks gt D Getting started Driving gt If necessary tighten the lap portion to Proper use of seat belts e Ensure that the seat belt is always fit a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up Seat belt height adjustment Adjust seat belt so that shoulder portion is located as close as possible to the middle of your shoulder it should not touch
76. service More than 300000 different spare parts for Mercedes Benz models are available Mercedes Benz original spare parts are subject to stringent quality inspections Each part has been specifically developed manufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes Benz vehicles Therefore Mercedes Benz original spare parts should be installed The use of non genuine parts and accessories not authorized by Mercedes Benz could damage the vehicle which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty or could compromise the vehicle s dura bility or safety Warranty coverage Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the warranties printed in the Service and Warranty Information booklet Your authorized Mercedes Benz Center will ex change or repair any defective parts origi nally installed in the vehicle in accordance with the terms of the following warranties e New Vehicle Limited Warranty e Emission System Warranty e Emission Performance Warranty e California Maine Massachusetts and Vermont Emission Control Systems Warranty Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes Benz Spare Parts and Accessories warranties copies of which are available at any Mercedes Benz Center Technical data Warranty coverage Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information booklet have your authorized Mercedes Benz Center arrange f
77. side air vents and out adjust side air vents upwards gt Select any of the six air volume speeds using the air volume control 1 gt page 149 and the air distribution Controls in detail Climate control Deactivating gt Press button Keg The indicator lamp on the button goes out Defrosting is turned off Air recirculation mode Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle from the outside This setting cuts off the intake of outside air and recirculates the air in the passenger compartment AN Warning When the outside temperature is below 41 F 5 C only switch to air recirculation mode for short periods to prevent window fogging Activating gt Press button Ray The indicator lamp on the button comes on i If you keep button pressed the side windows and sliding pop up roof will be closed The air recirculation mode is activated automatically at high outside tempera tures If you have turned off the air condition ing gt page 154 or the outside temperature is below 41 F 5 C the air recirculation mode will not switch on automatically Deactivating gt Press button RJ The indicator lamp on the button goes out i If you keep button pressed the side windows and sliding pop up roof will be returned to their previous posi tion The air recirculation mode is deactivated automatically e after five minutes
78. solution gt Have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Make sure that there is nothing be tween seat cushion and child seat and check installation of the child seat If the light remains out have the sys tem checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Do not use the BabySmart restraint to transport children on the front pas senger seat until the system has been repaired Messages in the display The control system shows warning and malfunction messages in the multifunction display Certain warning and malfunction messag es are accompanied by an audible signal Address these messages accordingly and follow the additional instructions given in this Operator s Manual Selecting the malfunction memory menu in the control system gt page 118 displays both cleared and uncleared messages High priority messages appear in the multifunction display in red color Certain messages of high priority cannot be cleared from the multifunction display using the reset knob Other messages of high priority and messages of less immediate priority can be cleared from the multifunction display using the reset knob gt page 22 and are then stored in the malfunction message memory gt page 118 Warning A All categories of messages contain impor tant information which should be taken note of and where a malfunction is indicated ad dressed a
79. start from batteries with the same voltage rating 12 V Jump starting with a more powerful battery could damage the vehicle s electrical system which will not be covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty e Only use jumper cables with sufficient cross section and insulated terminal clamps e Always make sure that the jumper cables are not on or near pulleys fans or other parts that move when an engine is started or running Jump starting may only be performed on the battery installed in the engine compartment Avoid repeated and lengthy starting at tempts Do not attempt to start the engine using a battery quick charge unit If engine does not run after several unsuccessful starting attempts have it checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Excessive unburned fuel generated by repeated failed starting attempts may damage the catalytic converter and may present a fire risk Make sure the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any other metal part while the other end is still attached to a battery Practical hints Jump starting gt Connect negative terminal 3 of the charged battery with the under hood terminal 4 of the discharged battery with the jumper cables Clamp cable to charged battery 3 first Warning A Keep flames or sparks away from battery Do not smoke Observe all safety instructions and precau tions when
80. the neck Front seats oi DN I P91 40 2351 31 4 Button for belt outlet height adjust ment gt Press button 4 and slide belt outlet up ward or downward Do not twist the belt when fastening Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder portion is located as close as possible to the middle of the shoulder it should not touch the neck or pass under the arm For this purpose you can adjust the height of the belt outlet Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips over hip joint and not across the abdomen Place the seat backrest in a nearly up right position Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time Do not fasten a seat belt around a per son and another object at the same time Check your seat belt during travel to ensure that it is properly positioned ted snugly You should avoid wearing bulky clothing such as winter coats when traveling in the vehicle Warning A Do not pass belts over sharp edges They could tear Do not allow the belt to get caught in the door or in the seat adjustment mechanism This could damage the belt Never attempt to make modifications to seat belts This could impair the effective ness of the belts Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Getting started Driving Starting the engine Warning A Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to yo
81. the children are secured in a child restraint system Unsupervised chil dren in a child restraint system may use ve hicle equipment and may cause an accident and or serious personal injury BabySmart airbag deactivation system me a J rt J P68 10 2912 31 tM Special BabySmart compatible child seats designed for use with the Mercedes Benz system and available at any authorized Mercedes Benz Center are required for use with the BabySmart air bag deactivation system With the special child seat properly installed the passenger front airbag will not deploy t BabySma is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp The indicator lamp located in the center console will be illuminated except with the key removed or in the starter switch position 0 i The system does not deactivate the side impact airbag Self test BabySmart without special child seat installed After turning the key in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 the indicator lamp located in the center console lights up for approx six seconds and then goes out If the indicator lamp should not come on or is continuously lit the system is not func tioning You must see an authorized Mercedes Benz Center before seating any child on the passenger seat More information can be found in the Practical hints section gt page 260 Safety and Security Occupant safety A The BabySmart airbag deac
82. the glossary of technical terms this symbol is used to cross reference term defini tions Display Words appearing in the multi function display are printed in the type shown here Introduction Operating safety Operating safety Proper use of the vehicle _______ __ Proper use of the vehicle requires that you Work improperly carried out on electronic are familiar with the following information components and associated software could and rules cause them to cease functioning Because A e the safety precautions in this manual the vehicle s electronic components are in terconnected any modification made may e the Technical data section in this produce an undesired effect on other sys manual tems e traffic rules and regulations Electronic system malfunctions could seri ously impair the operating safety of your ve hicle e motor vehicle laws and safety stan dards Ensure that any repairs or modifications to electronic components are carried out by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Other improper work or modifications on the vehicle could also have a negative impact on the operating safety of the vehicle Some safety systems only function while the engine is running You should therefore nev er turn off the engine while driving Introduction Problems with your vehicle Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle particularly one that you beli
83. the handling characteristics of the vehicle A Always fasten items being carried as secure ly as possible Warning In an accident during hard braking or sud den maneuvers loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle and can cause in jury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle To help avoid personal injury during a colli sion or sudden maneuver exercise care when transporting cargo Never drive vehicle with trunk open Deadly carbon monoxide CO gases may enter ve hicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death i The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects The enlarged cargo area should only be used for items which do not fit in the trunk alone Useful features Interior storage spaces Warning A To help avoid personal injury during a colli sion or sudden maneuver exercise care when stowing objects in the vehicle Put lug gage or cargo in the trunk if possible Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backs Do not place anything on the shelf below the rear window Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy objects Keep compartment lids closed This will help to prevent stored objects from being thrown about and injuring vehicle occupants during an accident Glove box 1 Glove box lid release 2 Glove box Opening the glove box gt Pull lid release 1 The glove box lid opens downward Closing the glove bo
84. the ratio of any one of these oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10 MTBE not to exceed 15 The ratio of Methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3 plus additional cosolvents Using mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol is not allowed Gasohol which contains 10 Ethanol and 90 unleaded gasoline can be used These blends must also meet all other fuel requirements such as resistance to spark knock boiling range vapor pressure etc Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Gasoline additives A major concern among engine manufac turers is carbon build up caused by gaso line Mercedes Benz recommends only the use of quality gasoline containing additives that prevent the build up of carbon depos its After an extended period of using fuels without such additives carbon deposits can build up especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area leading to en gine performance problems such as e Warm up hesitation e Unstable idle e Knocking pinging e Misfire e Power loss Do not blend any specific fuel additives with fuel This only results in unnecessary cost and may be harmful to engine opera tion Damage or malfunctions resulting from poor fuel quality or from blending specific fuel additives are not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Flexible Fuel Vehicles MY 2003 Mercedes Benz C 320 models except those equipped with manual trans mission or 4MATIC are Flexible
85. to selected memory po sition Press memory button 1 Release memory button and push button 2 within three seconds All the settings are stored at the select ed position Controls in detail Memory function Recalling positions from memory gt Turn button 2 to selected memory po sition gt Press and hold button 2 until the seat steering wheel and rear view mirrors have fully moved to the stored posi tions i Releasing the button immediately stops movement to the stored posi tions A Do not operate the power seats using the memory button if the seat backrest is in an excessively reclined position Doing so could cause damage to front or rear seats Warning First move backrest to an upright position Controls in detail Memory function Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position For easier parking you can adjust the passenger side exterior rear view mirror so that you can see the right rear wheel as soon as you engage reverse gear R You can store a parking position for the passenger exterior rear view mirror for each key using the memory button For information about activating the parking position see Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position gt page 145 1 Memory button 2 Adjustment button 3 Passenger side exterior rear view mirror Stop the vehicle Switch ignition on if not already on Press button 3 The pas
86. when the following lamps malfunction e Standing lamps e Tail lamps e Rear fog lamp P54 00 2318 31 Front lamps _ N Lamp Additional turn signal lamps Turn signal lamp Halogen Turn signal lamp Bi Xenon Low beam Halogen Low and high beam High beam Parking and standing lamps Fog lamp Side marker lamp Type LED 1156 A 2357 A H7 55 W Bi Xenon H7 55 W W5W HB4 9006 55 W W5W Rear lamps 10 11 12 13 Lamp High mounted brake lamp Brake lamp Turn signal lamp Backup lamp Tail parking standing and side marker lamp License plate lamps Rear fog lamp driver s side Type LED P21 W PY 21 W P21W R5W CSW P21 W Notes on bulb replacement Warning A Keep bulbs out of reach of children Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot Al low the lamp to cool down before changing a bulb Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas A bulb can explode if you e touch or move it when hot e drop the bulb e scratch the bulb Wear eye and hand protection Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician Practical hints Replacing bulbs Use only 12 volt bulbs of the same type and with the specified watt rating Switch lights off before changing a bulb to prevent short circuits Always use a clean lint
87. your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal More information on driving can be found in the Operation section gt page 223 Switching on headlamps Exterior lamp switch 1 Off 2 Low beam headlamps on gt Turn the switch to Bey More information can be found in the Controls in detail section gt page 101 Getting started Turn signals and high beam i To signal minor directional changes move combination switch to point of resistance only and release The turn signal blinks three times The combination switch is on the left of the steering column High beam gt Push the combination switch forward The high beam symbol E in the instrument cluster lights up More information can be found in the Controls in detail section gt page 104 Combination switch 1 Turn signals right 2 Turn signals left gt Press the combination switch up 1 or down 2 Getting started Driving Windshield wipers The combination switch is on the left of the steering column Combination switch 1 Single wipe 2 Switching on windshield wipers gt Make sure that the ignition is switched on Switching on windshield wipers gt Turn the combination switch to the de sired position depending on the inten sity of the rain O Windshield wipers off l Intermittent wiping Il Normal wiper speed Ill Fast wiper speed Vehicles without rain sensor Fast wiper speed
88. 0 H Halogen type Front lamp bulbs 292 Hand held transmitter Programming integrated remote control 218 Hands free microphone 27 Hard plastic trim items Cleaning 252 Hazard warning flasher 104 Switching off 104 Switching on 104 Head restraints 94 Manual seats 33 Power seats 35 Rearseats 35 Headlamp cleaning system 241 Headlamp shut off delay see Delayed shut off exterior lamps Headlamps Automatic control 102 Bi Xenon type Replacing bulbs 293 Bi Xenon 341 Cleaning 251 Cleaning system 146 241 338 Halogen type Replacing bulbs 292 Refilling washer fluid 241 Switching off 52 Switching on 47 Washer fluid 338 Headliner Cleaning 252 Heated seats 97 Height adjustment Head restraints Seat belts 43 Steering wheel 37 High beam flasher 47 104 High beam headlamps Messages in display 274 Replacing bulbs 290 292 Switching on 104 High beam headlamps xenon type Replacing bulbs 293 High mounted brake lamp 291 Hood 235 Closing 236 Message in display 272 Opening 235 Hydroplaning 227 33 35 37 Identification labels 318 Certification label 31 Vehicle identification number VIN Ignition 31 Switching on Immobilizer 79 Activating 79 318 44 Deactivating 79 Indicator lamps 8 see Lamps indicator and warning Infant and child restraint systems LATCH child seat anchors About service and warranty Installing 68 Information Button for Tele Inside rear view mi Adjusting 39 Antig
89. 0 cm The hood will lock audibly gt Check to make sure that the hood is fully closed If you can raise the hood at a point above the headlamps then it is not properly closed Open it again and let it drop with somewhat greater force Engine oil The amount of oil your engine needs will depend on a number of factors including driving style Higher oil consumption can occur when e the vehicle is new e the vehicle is driven frequently at high er engine speeds Engine oil consumption checks should only be made after the vehicle break in period Checking engine oil level When checking the oil level the vehicle must e be parked on level ground e be at normal operating temperature e have been stationary for at least five minutes with the engine turned off Operation Engine compartment You can check the engine oil level on the After about three seconds this mes Adding engine oil multifunction display sage is displayed gt Turn the key in the starter switch to ENGINE OIL LEVEL MEASURING NOW position 2 One of the following messages will sub The standard display gt page 116 should sequently appear in the indicator appear in the multifunction display e ENGINE 0 EVEL OK gt Press button or Ea on the E OIL LEVEL ADD steering wheel until the following mes a ae p G l sage is seen in the multifunction dis t cies ae play e ENGINE OIL LEVEL ADD A E
90. 00 rpm 333 ft lb 4400 rpm 450 Nm 4400 rpm 6200 rpm 1 4 3 6 2 5 9 ft 6 in 2902 mm The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment Technical data Rims and Tires Rims and Tires Use only tires and rims which have been specifically developed for your vehicle and tested and approved by Mercedes Benz Other tires and rims can have detrimental effects such as e poor handling characteristics e increased noise e increased fuel consumption Moreover tires and rims not approved by Mercedes Benz may under load exhibit dimensional variations and dif ferent tire deformation characteristics under load that could cause them to come into contact with the vehicle body or axle parts Damage to the tires or the vehicle may be the result i Further information on tires and rims is available at any authorized Mercedes Benz Center A tire inflation pressure table is located on the fuel fill er cap of the vehicle The tire pressure should be checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires Follow tire manufacturer s mainte nance recommendation included with vehicle Same size tires Rims light alloy Rims steel Canada only Wheel offset All season tires radial ply tires Summer tires radial ply tires Winter tires radial ply tires 1 Must not be used with snow chains
91. 1 all the way in un til it engages For your protection drive only with properly positioned head restraints The steering wheel is once again 7 locked into position Adjust head restraint to support the back of the head approximately at ear level Getting started Adjusting 1 Steering wheel adjustment electrical Steering column lengthen or shorten Do not drive the vehicle until you have The stalk is located on the steering column Move stalk forward or backward in the properly locked the steering column lower left direction of arrow 1 until a comfortable steering wheel position is reached with If the warning message STEERING your arms slightly bent at the elbow WHEEL ADJUST LOCK is displayed while the engine is running the steer ing column is not locked properly gt page 276 Steering column height gt Move stalk up or down in the direction of arrow 2 Make sure that your legs can move freely and that all the dis plays including malfunction and indi cator lamps on the instrument cluster are clearly visible 1 Steering column lengthen or shorten 2 Steering column height i gt Turn the key in the starter switch to With the memory function position 1 or 2 page 98 you can store steering or wheel positions together with settings for the seats and the exterior rear view gt Open the driver s door imirrars Mirrors Adjust the inside and exterior rear v
92. 3 122 Closing Glove box 203 Hood 236 Side windows 187 Sliding pop up roof 190 289 Sliding pop up roof with SmartKey 191 Trunk lid 89 Windows 187 Windows with SmartKey 188 Closing sliding pop up roof In an emergency 289 Cockpit 20 341 Cockpit management and data system COMAND 342 COMAND see separate operating instructions Combination switch 104 High beam flasher 47 Turn signals 47 Windshield wipers 48 Consumer information 339 Control and operation of radio transmitters 230 Control system 111 342 AUDIO menu 116 Convenience submenu 129 Display digital speedometer 116 Functions 112 115 Instrument cluster submenu 122 Lighting submenu 125 Malfunction memory menu 118 Menus 114 115 343 Multifunction display 111 Multifunction steering wheel 112 NAVI menu 118 Selecting radio system 117 Settings menu 119 Standard display menu 116 Submenus 113 115 TEL menu 134 Trip computer menu 132 Vehicle submenu 128 Convenience submenu 129 Activating easy entry exit feature 129 Setting key dependency 131 Setting parking position for exterior rear view mirror 131 Coolant 238 336 Adding 239 Anticorrosion antifreeze quantity 336 Capacities 329 Checking level 238 Messages in display 266 267 Temperature 232 Temperature display 108 Warning lamp 267 Coolant level Checking 234 238 Cruise control 193 342 Canceling 194 Driving downhill 194 Driving uphill 194 Fine adjustment 195 Saving current speed 194 Setting spee
93. 67 6372 for details i Airbags are designed to activate only in certain frontal front airbags impacts or side side impact and head protec tion window curtain airbags impacts which exceed preset thresholds Only during these types of impacts if of sufficient severity to meet the deploy ment thresholds will they provide their supplemental protection The driver and passenger should al ways wear their seat belts Otherwise it is not possible for the airbags to pro vide their supplemental protection In cases of other frontal impacts an gled impacts roll overs other side im pacts rear collisions or other accidents the airbags will not be acti vated The driver and passengers will then be protected by the fastened seat belts We caution you not to rely on the pres ence of the airbags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt Safety and Security Occupant safety Your vehicle was originally equipped with airbags that are designed to acti vate in certain impacts exceeding a pre set threshold to reduce the potential and severity of injury It is important to your safety and that of your passenger that you replace deployed airbags and repair any malfunctioning airbags to en sure that the vehicle will continue to provide supplemental crash protection for occupants Safety guidelines for the seat belt emergency tensioning device and airbag Warning AN Damaged seat belts or belts that were
94. 9 Starter switch 21 31 Positions 31 Starting difficulties 45 Starting position 31 Starting the engine 44 Station radio Search 117 Station selection Setting 128 Steel rims Technical data 323 Steering column Height adjustment 37 38 Length adjustment 37 38 Messages in display 276 290 291 293 294 Steering gear oil Message in display 276 Steering wheel Adjusting 37 Buttons 24 Cleaning 252 Electrical adjustment 38 Height adjustment 38 Manual adjustment 37 Stolen vehicle Tracking services 217 Stopping Sliding pop up roof 191 Windows 188 Storage compartments Armrest 205 Glove box 203 Ventilated compartments 155 Storage spaces Cup holder 204 Storing Memory function Positions into memory 99 Submenus 115 Convenience 129 For settings 113 In control system 115 Instrument cluster 122 Lighting 125 Resetting functions in Control system 120 Selecting 120 Settings menu 120 Vehicle 128 Sun visors 146 Sunshade 147 Supplemental Restraint System SRS 344 Switching Fuel Flexible fuel vehicle 334 Switching off Audio system 168 Automatic central locking control system 129 Delayed exterior lamps 126 Engine 53 ESP 76 Hazard warning flasher 104 Headlamps 52 Seat heating 97 Switching on Audio system 168 Automatic central locking control system 129 ESP 77 Front fog lamps 103 Hazard warning flasher 104 Headlamps 47 High beams 104 Rapid seat heating 97 Rear fog lamp 103 Seat heating 97
95. C 230 Kompressor Sport C 240 C 240 4MATIC C 320 C 320 4MATIC C 320 Sport C 320 4MATIC Sport C 32 AMG Our company and staff congratulate you on the purchase of your new Mercedes Benz Your selection of our product is a demon stration of your trust in our company name Further it exemplifies your desire to own an automobile that will be as easy as possible to operate and provide years of service Your Mercedes Benz represents the ef forts of many skilled engineers and crafts men To help assure your driving pleasure and also the safety of you and your passen gers we ask you to make a small invest ment of time e Please read this manual carefully be fore putting it aside Then return it to your vehicle where it will be handy for your reference e Please follow the recommendations contained in this manual They are de signed to acquaint you with the opera tion of your Mercedes Benz e Please pay attention to the warnings and cautions contained in this manual They are designed to help improve the safety of the vehicle operator and oc cupants We extend our best wishes for many miles of safe pleasurable driving Mercedes Benz USA LLC A DaimlerChrysler Company Introduction ccccccccccceeeeeeeesseeeee Product information Operator s Manual cceeesseeeeees Service and warranty information Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Mercedes Benz aut
96. Change of Address Notice found in the Service and Warranty Informa tion Booklet or simply call the Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Center in the USA at 1 800 FOR MERCedes or Customer Service in Canada at 1 800 387 0100 It is in your own interest that we can contact you should the need arise If you sell your Mercedes please leave all literature with the vehicle to make it avail able to the next operator If you bought this vehicle used be sure to send in the Notice of Purchase of Used Car found in the Service and Warranty In formation Booklet or call the Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Cen ter in the USA at 1 800 FOR MERCedes or Customer Service in Canada at 1 800 387 0100 Introduction Operator s Manual Operating your vehicle outside the USA Certain Mercedes Benz models are avail or Canada able for delivery in Europe under our Euro pean Delivery Program For details consult If you plan to operate your vehicle in for your authorized Mercedes Benz Center or eign countries please be aware that write to e service facilities or replacement parts e inthe USA may not be readily available Mercedes Benz USA LLC e unleaded gasoline for vehicles with cat European Delivery Department alytic converters may not be available One Mercedes Drive the use of leaded fuels will damage the Montvale NJ 07645 0350 catalysts e in Canada e gasoline may have a considerably low er octane rati
97. Fuel Ve hicles These vehicles are designed to operate on premium unleaded gasoline or Ethanol fuel E85 or on any mixture of these two Ethanol fuel E85 is a mixture of approxi mately 85 Ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline Warning A Ethanol fuel E85 and its fumes are highly flammable poisonous and burn easily Etha nol fuel can cause serious injuries if ignited or if you come into contact with it or inhale fumes of it Avoid inhalation of Ethanol fumes and skin contact with Ethanol Extin guish all open flames before fueling Never smoke or create sparks close to Ethanol Switching fuels For best performance and driveability it is recommended to use either one or the other fuel A refueling pattern that alternates between the two different fuels should be avoided if possible When switching fuels make sure that e Fuel level is below half full e Fuel level is above reserve reserve warning lamp is not lit e Amount of added fuel is more than 5 gallons 20 liters e Ignition is off during refill e Immediately after refueling engine is started and operated for at least five minutes These precautions and recommendations are supposed to prevent any difficulties when starting and operating the engine which otherwise may be experienced before the engine has fully adapted to the different fuel If in spite of these recommendations the engine does not perform properly adding more gasoline at least 3
98. III goes to setting Il when the vehicle is standing still Vehicles with rain sensor Intermittent wiping interval dependent on wetness of windshield Wiping will not occur with a front door open Vehicles with rain sensor Do not leave in intermittent setting when vehicle is taken to an automatic car wash or during windshield cleaning Wipers will operate in presence of wa ter sprayed on the windshield and wip ers may be damaged as a result The switch should not be left in inter mittent setting as the wipers will wipe the windshield once every time the en gine is started Dust that accumulates on the windshield might scratch the glass when wiping occurs on a dry windshield Single wipe gt Press switch briefly in the direction of arrow 1 The windshield wipers wipe one time without washer fluid Wiping with windshield washer fluid gt Press switch in the direction of arrow 1 past the resistance point The windshield wiper operates with washer fluid Information on filling up the washer reser voir can be found in the Operation sec tion gt page 241 If leaves snow etc block the wind shield wipers switch off the wipers e For safety reasons withdraw key from starter switch Remove block age e Turn the windshield wipers on again If windshield wipers fail to function at all in switch position l e set the combination switch to the next highest wiper speed e have the windshi
99. Minispare wheel mounted Minispare wheel bolts Warning A Be sure to use the original length wheel bolts when remounting the original wheel after it has been repaired P40 10 2770 31 1 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims 2 Wheel bolt for Minispare wheel or other steel rims Wheel bolts 2 must be used when mounting the Minispare wheel The use of any wheel bolts other than wheel bolts 2 for the Minispare wheel can cause physical damage to the vehicle Practical hints Unlocking locking in an emergency Unlocking locking in an emergency Unlocking the vehicle gt Move locking tab 1 in direction of ar ay row and slide the mechanical key 2 out In case of a malfunction in the central lock of the housing ing system you can unlock the trunk sepa rately gt page 91 Unlocking your vehicle with the me chanical key will trigger the anti theft alarm system To cancel the alarm do one of the following e Press button or on the SmartKey Unlocking the driver s door If you are unable to unlock the driver s door using the SmartKey open the door using the mechanical key e Insert the key in the starter switch 3 Unlocked 4 Locked gt Unlock the door with the mechanical key To do so push the mechanical key N 5 in the lock until it stops and turn it to the left 3 P80 20 2390 31 1 Mechanical key locking tab 2 Mechanical key Practical hints Unlocking locking in an emerg
100. NGINE OIL LEVEL MEASUREMENT IN 1 5 QUARTS 1 5 LITERS 1 Filler neck PROCESS CORRECT MEASUREMENT ONLY e ENGINE OIL LEVEL ADD gt Unscrew the cap from filler neck 1 Be IF VEH LEVEL 2 QUARTS 2 0 LITERS careful not to overfill with oil RN Be careful not to spill any oil when adding 80 MP Avoid environmental damage caused by oil 60 100 entering the ground or water S A gt om 120 2 gt Screw the cap back on the filler neck oR y D aja 1407 T S Excessive oil must be siphoned or 160 drained off It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty PIF 99 0900 31 237 Operation Engine compartment Other display messages If there is excessive engine oil with the en gine at normal operating temperature the following message will appear ENGINE OIL LEVEL REDUCE OIL LEVEL gt Have excess oil siphoned If the key is not turned to position 2 in the starter switch FOR ENGINE OIL LEVEL IGNITION ON PLEASE gt Switch on the ignition If you see the message OBSERVE WAITING PERIOD gt Wait five minutes before repeating check procedure If you see the message ENGINE OIL LEVEL NOT WHEN ENGINE ON gt Turn off the engine If engine is at nor mal operating temperature wait five minutes before checking oil If the en gine is not yet at normal operating tem perature you must wait 30 minutes before checking oil
101. Replacement batteries Lithium type C gt Remove the batteries gt Using a lint free cloth insert new bat teries under the contact spring with the Remove mechanical key 1 plus side facing up gt page 285 R 2025 or equivalent gt Return battery compartment into hous Insert the mechanical key in side open ing until it locks into place ing and push gray slide The battery compartment 2 is un latched Pull the battery compartment 2 out of the key housing in direction of arrow Fuel filler flap S Open trunk lid Fold away right side tail lamp trim Reach inside through opening 2 Turn release knob 1 clockwise arrow The fuel filler flap can now be opened Practical hints Unlocking locking in an emergency Manually unlocking the transmission gt selector lever In the case of power failure the transmis sion selector lever can be manually un locked e g to tow the vehicle gt gt P27 60 2320 31 gt 1 Coin holder 2 Tool Open the storage compartment in front of the center armrest gt page 205 Release coin holder 1 e g using a small coin Swing coin holder 1 aside Insert a tool 2 e g flat blade screw driver into the opening Perform the following two steps simul taneously gt Push the tool down gt Move selector lever from position P Reinstall the coin holder 1 after remov ing the tool 2 from the opening i
102. The raising or lowering procedure can be im mediately halted by briefly pressing the up per or lower half of the switch Briefly press upper or lower half of the switch again to raise or lower the rear win dow sunshade completely Controls in detail Good visibility Warning A When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from starter switch and lock your vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equip ment can cause an accident and or serious personal injury Controls in detail Climate control Climate control tana P83 30 3704 31 Item 1 Air volume control for left center air vent Left center air vent adjustable Right center air vent adjustable Air volume control for right center air vent Air volume control for side air vent Side air vent adjustable Side defroster vent fixed N A oO Climate control panel i For draft free ventilation move the slid ers for the center air vents to the mid dle position Climate control panel Controls in detail Climate control Item Air volume control Left side temperature control Right side temperature control Air distribution control switch Rear window defroster AC cooling on off AGC Air distribution and air volume automatic N GQ oO fP WD 8 Air recirculation 9 Defrosting The storage compartment b
103. The yellow ESP warning lamp lights up while driving The yellow ESP warning lamp flashes while driving General information If a bulb in the instrument cluster fails to light up during the bulb self check when Possible cause The ESP is deactivated Risk of accident Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail ing road conditions The ESP or traction control has come into operation because of detected traction loss in at least one tire turning the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 2 have it checked and replaced if necessary Suggested solution gt Turn the ESP back on gt page 75 If the ESP cannot be turned back on have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possi ble gt When driving off apply as little throttle as possible gt While driving ease up on the accelera tor gt Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather condi tions gt Do not deactivate the ESP Exceptions gt page 75 Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accidents Problem The yellow ABS malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving The red SRS indicator lamp lights up while driving AN In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi cated as outlined above the SRS may not be Warning Possible cause Practical hints What to do if Suggested solution The ABS has detected a malfunction and has Co
104. Unlocking the driver s door Unlocking the trunk 91 285 Night security illumination 103 Information Booklet 317 Unlocking transmission Parking lamps 101 Low beam headlamps selector lever 288 Rear fog lamp 103 Messages in display 272 Manual seat Settings control system 125 Replacing bulbs 290 292 Adjusting 33 Trunk lamp 106 Lowering Adjusting backrest tilt 33 Limiting the gear range 140 Vehicle 301 Adjusting head restraint height 33 Limp Home Mode 143 Lubricants Adjusting head restraint tilt 34 Loading 196 Technical data 329 Adjusting seat cushion tilt 33 Instructions 202 M Adjusting seat height 33 Roof rack 196 Main dimensions 327 Front seat head restraints 94 Ski sack 196 Maintenance 12 247 Seat fore and aft adjustment 33 Split rear bench seat 199 Manual transmission 137 Vehicles with E85 fuel 335 Locator lighting 103 Shifting into reverse 137 i Malfunction i Setting 126 Displaying 119 Starting with 44 Lock button 343 paying MAXCOOL Maximum cooling 160 Malfunction memory 118 Callingup 118 Clearing 119 MB Tex upholstery Cleaning 253 Mechanical key 285 Memory function 98 343 Recalling positions from memory 99 Storing exterior rear view mirror parking positions 100 Storing key dependent settings 99 Menus 112 AUDIO 116 Control system 343 In control system 114 115 Malfunction memory 118 NAVI 118 Settings menu 119 Standard display 116 Submenus 113 TEL 134 Trip computer 132 Microphone Hands free
105. Window cleaning Use a window cleaning solution on all glass surfaces An automotive glass cleaner is recommended i For safety reasons switch off wipers and remove key from starter switch be fore cleaning the windshield otherwise the wiper motor can suddenly turn on and cause injury Operation Vehicle care Light alloy wheels Mercedes Benz approved Wheel Care should be used for regular cleaning of the light alloy wheels If possible clean wheels once a week with Mercedes Benz approved Wheel Care using a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of water Follow instructions on container i Use only acid free cleaning materials Acid could lead to corrosion Instrument cluster Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution Wipe with a cloth moist ened in lukewarm solution Do not use scouring agents Steering wheel and gear selector lever Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes Benz approved Leather Care Cup holder Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution Wipe with a cloth moist ened in lukewarm solution Do not use scouring agents Hard plastic trim items Pour Mercedes Benz approved Interior Care onto soft lint free cloth and apply with light pressure Plastic and rubber parts Do not use oil or wax on these parts Headliner and shelf below rear w
106. a lug wrench with which threaded fasteners such as wheel bolts are tightened Tire speed rating Part of tire designation indicates the speed range for which a tire is ap proved Traction Force exerted by the vehicle on the road via the tires Technical terms VIN Vehicle Identification Number The number set by the manufacturer and placed on the body to uniquely identify each vehicle produced Voice control system Voice control system for car phones portable cell phones and audio sys tems radio CD etc A ABS 23 73 341 ABS control 74 Malfunction indicator lamp 257 Messages in display 262 Warning lamp 257 Accelerator position automatic transmission 143 Accident Incase of 50 Activating Air conditioning cooling 154 163 Air recirculation mode 152 160 Anti theft alarm system 79 Automatic climate control 157 Central locking control system 129 Charcoal filter 161 Climate control 149 Climate control system 153 Defrosting 151 Easy entry exit feature 129 ESP 77 Exterior headlamps 47 Exterior lamps 102 Exterior rear view mirror parking position 145 Hazard warning flasher 104 Headlamps 47 High beams 104 Ignition 31 Immobilizer 53 79 Rear fog lamp 102 Rear window defroster Residual heat 163 Seat heater 97 Tow away alarm 80 Windshield wipers 48 153 162 Adding Coolant 239 Engine oil 237 Additional turn signals 290 Adjustable air vents rear passenger compartment 155 164 Adj
107. a malfunction in the system has been detected If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above the system may not operate as expected Have the system checked at the nearest Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Emergency calls An emergency call is initiated automatically e following an accident in which the emergency tensioning devices ETDs or airbags deploy e if the anti theft alarm or the tow away alarm stays on for more than 20 seconds See anti theft alarm sys tem gt page 79 and tow away alarm gt page 80 An emergency call can also be initiated manually by opening the cover next to the inside rear view mirror labeled SOS then briefly pressing the button located under the cover See below for instructions on initiating an emergency call manually Once the emergency call is in progress the indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin to flash The message EMERGENCY CALL CONNECTING CALL appears in the multifunc tion display When the connection is estab lished the message EMERGENCY CALL CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunc Controls in detail Useful features tion display All information relevant to the emergency such as the location of the ve hicle determined by the GPS satellite loca tion system vehicle model identification number and color are generated A voice connection between the Response Center and the occupants of the vehicle will be established automatically soon a
108. age gt Move the selection marker with the or E button to the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu gt Press button EAN or Red repeatedly until you see this message in the display TEXT The selection marker is on the current setting gt Press or E to select the language to be used for the multifunction display messages Available languages German English French Italian Spanish Selecting display speed display or outside temperature gt Move the selection marker with the or ESB button to the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu gt Press button or repeatedly until you see this message in the display SELECT DISPLAY The selection marker is on the current setting gt Press or FJ to select the display permanently shown in the multifunction display Lighting submenu Access the LIGHTING submenu via the SETTINGS menu Use the LIGHTING submenu to change the lamp and lighting settings on your vehicle The following functions are available Function Page Set daytime running lamp mode see USA only below Set locator lighting 126 Exterior lamps delayed shut off 126 Interior lighting delayed shut off 127 Controls in detail Setting daytime running lamp mode USA only gt Move the selection marker with the or FES button to the LIGHTING submenu gt Press button EAN or Keg repeatedly until you see this message in the display LAMP CIRCUIT HEADLAMP MODE The selection marker is on
109. age well casing 4 over the Minispare wheel Be sure that the arrow 2 on storage well casing 4 points in the direction of travel Place storage well casing gt page 279 over the vehicle tool kit storage well casing 4 and turn the retaining screw gt page 279 clockwise to its stop to secure the Minispare wheel i The arrow 2 on vehicle tool kit storage well casing 4 must point in the direction of travel otherwise you cannot place the storage well casing gt page 279 on top and secure the Minispare wheel with the retaining screw gt page 279 To prevent damage always disengage trunk floor handle from upper edge of trunk and lower trunk floor before closing the trunk lid Practical hints Where will I find A The dimensions of the Minispare wheel are different from those of the road wheels As a result the vehicle handling characteristics change when driving with a Minispare wheel mounted Warning The Minispare wheel should only be used temporarily and should be replaced with a regular road wheel as quickly as possible Practical hints Where will I find In the case of a flat tire you may temporarily use the Minispare wheel when observing the following restrictions e Do not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph 80 km h e Drive to the nearest tire repair facility to have the flat tire repaired or replaced as appropriate e Do not operate vehicle with more than one
110. ain ap proximately 2 into 5 in 5 cmto 12 cm away from the surface of the integrated remote control located on the inside rear view mirror keeping the indicator lamp in view Using both hands simultaneously push the hand held transmitter button and the desired integrated remote control button Do not release the buttons until completing next step The indicator lamp on the integrated remote control will flash first slowly and then rapidly The rapid flashing lamp indicates successful program ming of the new frequency signal When the indicator lamp flashes rapid ly release both buttons bb gt To program the remaining two buttons repeat the above steps o If after several attempts you do not successfully program the integrated re l mote control device to learn the signal of the hand held transmitter the ga rage door opener could be equipped with the rolling code feature i Rolling code programming To train a garage door opener or other roll ing code devices with the rolling code fea ture follow these instructions after completing the Programming portion of this text A second person may make the following training procedures quicker and easier gt Locate training button on the garage door opener motor head unit Exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand If there is difficulty locating the trans mitting button refer to garage door o
111. amp illumination is delayed or lamp is permanently on The left brake lamp is malfunctioning The right brake lamp is malfunctioning Practical hints What to do if Suggested solution gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt Have the LEDs replaced as soon as possible gt Have the LEDs replaced as soon as possible gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible p gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible p gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Practical hints What to do if Display Possible cause Suggested solution 3RD BRAKE LAMP The high mounted brake lamp is gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz CHECK LAMPS malfunctioning Center as soon as possible HIGH BEAM L The left high beam lamp is gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible CHECK LAMPS malfunctioning HIGH BEAM R The right high beam lamp is gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible CHECK LAMPS malfunctioning LICENSE PLATE LAMP L The left license plate lamp is gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible CHECK LAMPS malfunctioning LICENSE PLATE LAMP R The right license plate lamp is gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible CHECK LAMPS malfunctioning FRONT FOGLAMP L The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning
112. an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Warning A Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat except in a Mercedes Benz authorized BabySmart compatible child seat which operates with the BabySmart system installed in the ve hicle to deactivate the passenger side front airbag when it is properly installed Other wise they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash If this happens serious or fatal injury will result According to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat ing positions Infants and small children must ride in back seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system which is properly secured with the vehicle s seat belt and top tether strap or secured via lower anchors and top tether strap fully in accordance with the child seat manufactur er s instructions A child s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Manual seat 1 Seat fore and aft adjustment 2 Seat cushion tilt 3 Backrest tilt 4 Seat height Seat fore and aft adjustment v gt gt Lift handle 1 Slide seat to the desired position Allow handle 1 to reengage Check for
113. ary fuse box 313 B BabySmar Airbag deactivation system 67 341 Compatible child seats 67 341 Self test 67 Backrest Folding forward 200 Folding rearward 200 Backrest tilt 33 M Backup lamps 291 295 Bulbs 291 BAS 74 341 Messages in display 263 Batteries SmartKey Changing 286 287 Check lamp 85 Checking 86 Battery discharged Jump starting 306 Battery vehicle 240 303 Charging 304 Disconnecting 304 Messages in display 278 Reconnecting 305 Reinstalling 304 Removing 304 Bi Xenon headlamps 341 Bi Xenon type Front lamp bulbs 293 Block heater 246 Blocking Rear door window operation 71 Bolts For Minispare wheel 284 For spare wheel 282 Brake assist system BAS 341 Brake fluid 332 Checking 234 Brake lamp bulbs 291 Brake lamp high mounted 291 Brake pads Message in display 265 Brakes 224 Warning lamp 258 Break in period 222 Bulbs replacing 290 Additional turn signals 290 Backup lamps 291 Brake lamps 291 Fog lamps 290 Front lamps 290 High beam 290 High mounted brake lamp 291 License plate lamps 291 295 Low beam 290 Parking lamps 290 291 293 294 Rear fog lamp 291 295 Side marker lamps 290 294 Standing lamps 290 291 293 294 Tail lamp assemblies 291 295 Turn signal lamps 290 291 Button Audio system 168 c CAC Customer Assistance Center 341 California Important notice 11 Calling up Range distance to empty 133 Service indicator 248 CAN system 341 Capacities Fuels
114. atic transmission Canceling gear range limit gt Press and hold the selector lever in the D direction until D reappears in the tachometer display field The transmission will shift from the current gear range directly to gear range D Shifting into optimal gear range gt Press and hold the gear selector lever in the D direction The transmission will automatically select the gear range suited for optimal accelera tion and deceleration This will involve shifting down one or more gears Controls in detail Automatic transmission Gear ranges With the selector lever in position D you can limit the transmission s gear range by pressing the lever to the left D and re verse the gear range limit by pressing the lever to the right D The selected gear range will appear in the tachometer display field If you press on the accelerator when the engine has reached its rpm limit the transmission will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected Gear range v gt Effect The transmission shifts through fourth gear only The transmission shifts through third gear only With this selection you can use the braking effect of the engine Gear range Effect The transmission shifts through second gear only Allows the use of engine s braking power when driving e on steep downgrades e in mountainous regions e under extreme operating conditions The transmission operates only in
115. ause serious or even fatal injuries The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best re straint when the wearer is in an upright po sition and the belt is properly positioned on the body Warning VAN Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt Warning A Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked Only use seat belts which have been ap proved by Mercedes Benz Do not make any modifications to the seat belts This can lead to unintended activation or to failure Have all work carried out only by an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center Warning A USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY Seat belts can only work when used properly Never wear seat belts in any other way than as described in this sec tion as that could result in serious inju ries in case of an accident Each occupant should wear their seat belt at all times because seat belts help reduce the likelihood of and potential severity of injuries in accidents includ ing rollovers The integrated restraint system includes SRS driver airbag front passenger airbag side impact air bags head protection window curtain airbags for side windows ETD seat belt emergency tensioning device and front seat knee bolsters The system is de signed to enhance th
116. automatic transmission is found in the Getting start ed section gt page 44 Your transmission adapts its gear shifting process to your individual driving style by continually adjusting the shift points up or down These shift point adjustments are performed based on current operating and driving conditions If the operating conditions change the au tomatic transmission reacts by adjusting its gear shift program During the brief warm up the transmis sion upshifting is delayed This allows the catalytic converter to heat up more quickly to operating temperatures The automatic transmission selects indi vidual gears automatically depending on e the selector lever position D with gear ranges 4 3 2 1 gt page 140 the selected shift program W S gt page 142 e the position of the accelerator pedal gt page 143 e the vehicle speed The current selector lever position and shift program W S appear in the speed ometer display gt page 111 An additional indication of the current se lector lever position can be found on the cover of the shifting gate The indicators come on when you activate a switch e g unlocking the vehicle or opening a door and go out after approximately 15 minutes A It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forwar
117. belts belt tensioners airbags and child restraint systems As indepen dent systems their protective func tions complement one another RON Research Octane Number The Research Octane Number for gaso line as determined by a standardized method It is an indication of a gaso line s ability to resist undesired detona tion knocking The average of both the gt MON Motor Octane Number and RON Research Octane Number is posted at the pump also known as ANTI KNOCK INDEX Shift lock When the vehicle is parked this lock prevents the transmission selector le ver from being moved out of position P without key turned and brake pedal depressed SRS Supplemental Restraint System Seat belts emergency tensioning de vice and airbags Though independent systems they are closely interfaced to provide effective occupant protection Tele Aid System Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response automatic and man ual emergency roadside assistance and information Tele Aid is initially ac tivated by completing a subscriber agreement and placing an acquain tance call The Tele Aid system is operational pro viding that the vehicle s battery is charged properly connected not dam aged and cellular and GPS coverage is available Telematics A combination of the terms telecom munications and informatics Tightening torque Force times lever arm e g
118. ble tow rope or tow rod to vehicle chassis frame or suspension parts Installing towing eye bolt 1 Cover on right side of front bumper P88 20 2298 31 2 Cover on right side of rear bumper Practical hints Towing the vehicle Removing cover gt Press mark on cover in direction of ar row gt Lift cover off to reveal threaded hole for towing eye bolt The towing eye bolt is supplied with the tool kit located behind the left hand trim panel in cargo area gt Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and tighten with lug wrench Reinstalling cover gt Fit cover and snap into place Practical hints Fuses Fuses i Opening Fuse box in engine compartment Only install fuses that have been tested p Pull cover 1 open with a screw driver or gt The fuse box is located in the engine com and approved by Mercedes Benz and similar tool he left h that have the specified amperage rat panier on the ett inert Side ing gt Remove cover 1 rearward Never attempt to repair or bridge a Closing blown fuse Have the cause determined and remedied by an authorized gt Attach the cover 1 in the front Mercedes Benz Center gt Fold the cover 1 in until it engages Fuse box in passenger compartment Fuse chart a ee The fuse chart is found in the fuse box in K the passenger compartment The amper A S _ ages of the fuses are also given there 1 Screw var 2 Cover AY 3 Re
119. call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or 366 0123 in Washington D C area or write to NHTSA U S Department of Transportation Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor ve hicle safety from the Hotline At a glance Cockpit Instrument cluster Multifunction steering wheel Center console Overhead control panel Door control panel 3 i 4 bo e lt Item Combination switch e Turn signals e Windshield wipers e High beam Cruise control lever Instrument cluster Multifunction steering wheel Lever for voice control system see separate operating instructions Page 47 48 47 193 22 107 24 112 Item Overhead control panel Glove box lid release glove box lock Glove box Center console Starter switch Horn Steering wheel adjustment handle manual Steering wheel adjustment stalk electrical Page 27 203 203 25 31 37 38 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Ata Item Hood lock release Parking brake pedal Trunk lid release switch Door control panel Parking brake release Exterior lamp switch Exterior rear view mirror adjustment Headlamp washer switch glance Cockpit Page 235 45 51 88 28 45 101 39 146 1ta slance Instrument cluster Instrument cluster P54 30 6302 31 At a glance Instrument cluster Item Page Item Page Item Page Turn signa
120. can open the trunk from the inside if the vehicle is stationary A minimum height clearance of 5 75 ft 1 75 m is required to open the trunk lid The switch is located on the driver s door 3 1 Remote trunk lid release switch with in dicator lamp gt Press remote trunk lid release switch 1 The trunk lid opens The indicator lamp in the switch remains lit as long as the trunk is open The trunk lid swings open upwards au tomatically Always make sure that there is sufficient overhead clearance The trunk can also be opened using the SmartKey gt page 86 or from its inside in an emergency see Trunk lid emergency release D gt page 89 i If the vehicle was previously centrally locked the trunk lid will lock automati cally when closed gt page 89 The turn signals will flash three times to confirm locking If the vehicle was previously separately locked gt page 90 or locked with the SmartKey gt page 85 the trunk lid will remain locked Opening the trunk A minimum height clearance of 5 75 ft 1 75 m is required to open the trunk lid The handle is located above the rear li cense plate recess 1 Handle gt Pull handle 1 to open the trunk lid The trunk lid swings open upwards au tomatically Always make sure that there is sufficient overhead clearance i The vehicle must be unlocked Closing the trunk Warning A Only drive with the trunk close
121. ce Do not aim directly at electrical parts electrical connec tors seals or other rubber parts Tar stains Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and become more difficult to remove A tar remover is recommended Paintwork painted body components Mercedes Benz approved Paint Care should be applied when water drops on the paint surface do not bead up normally every three to five months depending on climate and washing detergent used Mercedes Benz approved Paint Cleaner should be applied if the paint surface shows signs of embedded dirt i e loss of gloss Do not apply any of these products or wax if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood is still hot Use the appropriate MB Touch Up Stick for quick and provisional repairs of minor paint damage i e chips from stones vehi cle doors etc Engine cleaning Prior to cleaning the engine compartment make sure to protect electrical compo nents and connectors from contact with water and cleaning agents Corrosion protection such as MB Anticor rosion Wax should be applied to the engine compartment after every engine cleaning Before applying all control linkage bush ings and joints should be lubricated The poly V belt and all pulleys should be pro tected from any wax Vehicle washing Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle in direct sunlight Use only a mild car wash detergent such as Mercedes Benz approved Car Shampoo Thorough
122. cedes Benz including e New Car Limited Warranty e Emission System Warranty e Emission Performance Warranty e California Maine Massachusetts and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty California Maine Massachusetts and Vermont only e State Warranty Enforcement Laws Lemon Laws Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Mercedes Benz automobiles Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price if Mercedes Benz USA LLC and or its au thorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or mal functions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty after a reasonable number of repair attempts During the pe riod of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18 000 miles approx 29 000 km on the odometer of the vehicle whichever occurs first a reasonable number of repair at tempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following oc curs 1 the same substantial defect or mal function results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven that de fect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times and you have directly notified Mercedes Benz USA LLC in writing of the need for its repair 2 the same substantial defect or mal function of a less serious nat
123. checked The coolant is also regularly checked each time you bring your vehicle to your authorized Mercedes Benz Center for service Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system Both the windshield and headlamp washer systems are supplied from the windshield washer fluid reservoir The washer fluid reservoir has a capacity of approx e 6 4 US qt 6 0 I in vehicles with head lamp cleaning system e 3 2 US qt 3 0 I in vehicles without headlamp cleaning system gt Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and water or concentrate and commercially avail able premixed windshield washer sol vent antifreeze depending on ambient temperatures A Washer solvent antifreeze is highly flamma ble Do not spill washer solvent antifreeze on hot engine parts because it may burn You can be seriously burned Warning Washer fluid mixing ratio For temperatures above freezing use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and water e part S to 100 parts water 40 ml S to 1 gallon 4 I water For temperatures below freezing use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent antifreeze e 1 part S to 100 parts solvent 40 ml S to 1 gallon 4 I solvent Consumer information The following text is published as required of all manufacturers
124. ches off too soon and the indicator lamp starts blinking this means that too many electrical consumers are operat ing simultaneously and there is insuffi cient voltage in the battery The system responds automatically by deactivating the rear window defroster As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage the rear window defroster au tomatically turns itself back on Air conditioning The air conditioning is operational while the engine is running and cools the interior air to the temperature set by the operator i Condensation may drip out from under neath the vehicle This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction Deactivating It is possible to deactivate the air condi tioning cooling function of the automatic climate control system The air in the vehi cle will then no longer be cooled or dehu midified gt Press button ACOFF The indicator lamp on the button ACOFF lights up Activating Moist air can fog up the windows You can dehumidify the air with the air condition ing gt Press ACOFF again The indicator lamp on the button ACOFF goes out The air conditioning uses the refrigerant R134a This refrigerant is free of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer If the air conditioning cannot be turned on again this indicates that the air con ditioning is losing refrigerant The com pressor has turned itself off Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest authorize
125. ct to moderate loads you should occasionally test the effectiveness of the brakes by applying above normal braking pressure at higher speeds This will also enhance the grip of the brake pads Be very careful not to endanger other road users when you apply the brakes Refer to the description of the Brake Assist System BAS gt page 74 If the parking brake is released and the brake warning lamp in the instrument clus ter stays on the brake fluid level in the res ervoir is too low Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may be the reason for low brake fluid in the res ervotr Have the brake system inspected at an au thorized Mercedes Benz Center immedi ately All checks and service work on the brake system should be carried out by an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center Only install brake pads and brake fluid recommended by Mercedes Benz A If other than recommended brake pads are installed or other than recommended brake fluid is used the braking properties of the vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe braking is substantially impaired This can result in an accident Warning When driving down long and steep grades relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a lower gear to use the engine s braking power This helps pre vent overheating of the brakes and re duces brake pad wear After hard braking it is advisable to drive on for some time rather than immediately parking so that th
126. cy see Trunk lid emer gency release gt page 89 i If the vehicle was previously centrally locked the trunk lid will lock automati cally when closed gt page 89 The turn signals will flash three times to confirm locking If the trunk lid was previously separately locked gt page 90 the trunk lid will remain locked Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key you should do the following gt Have the SmartKey deactivated by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center gt Report the loss of the SmartKey or the mechanical key immediately to your car insurance company gt If necessary have the mechanical lock replaced Your authorized Mercedes Benz Center will be glad to supply you with a replace ment Opening the doors from the inside You can open a locked door from the in side Open door only when conditions are safe to do so 1 Locking knob 2 Inside door handle gt Pull on door handle 2 If door was locked locking knob 1 will move up Controls in detail Locking and unlocking i If the vehicle has previously been locked from the outside opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti theft alarm system To cancel the alarm do one of the following e Press button or on the SmartKey e Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Opening the trunk from the inside You
127. d notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Do not add brake fluid This will not solve the problem Brake pad thickness must be visually checked by a qualified technican at the intervals specified in the Service booklet Practical hints What to do if Display COOLANT CHECK LEVEL Warning A Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts You can be seriously burned Possible cause The coolant level is too low Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning Extended driving with the message and symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system The engine will overheat causing major en gine damage Suggested solution gt Add coolant gt page 238 gt Ifyou have to add coolant frequently have the cooling system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Display COOLANT STOP ENGINE OFF A Driving when your engine is badly overheat ed can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire You could be seriously burned Warning Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the engine hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Turn off the eng
128. d Mercedes Benz Center Controls in detail Automatic climate control Residual heat and ventilation With the engine switched off it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the interior for up to 30 minutes This feature makes use of the residual heat produced by the engine Activating gt Turn the key in the starter switch to position 1 or remove it from the starter switch gt Press button DB The indicator lamp on button BEB comes on Deactivating gt Press button DB The indicator lamp on button ERY goes off Controls in detail Automatic climate control The residual heat is automatically turned Rear passenger compartment adjust GD a able air vents memm Four blower speeds are available e when the ignition is switched on The temperature at the air vents for rear passenger compartment 1 and 3 is the same as at the dashboard center air vents e after about 30 minutes e ifthe battery voltage drops e How long the system will provide heat ing depends on the coolant tempera ture and the temperature set by the operator The blower will run at speed setting 1 regardless of the air distribu tion control setting 1 Center air vent left 2 Thumbwheel for air volume control for center air vents 3 Center air vent right 4 Closing center air vents 5 Opening center air vents 6 Switching on blower Adjusting the air volume gt Turn thumbwheel 2 Audio system A
129. d as among other dangers such as visibility blockage exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior i To prevent an inadvertent lockout do not place the key in the trunk 1 Handle gt Lower trunk lid using the handle 1 Warning A To prevent possible personal injury always keep hands and fingers away from the trunk opening when closing the trunk Be espe cially careful when small children are around Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Trunk lid emergency release The emergency release button is located on the inside of the trunk lid G 1 Emergency release button gt Briefly press the emergency release button The trunk unlocks and the trunk lid opens The emergency release button unlocks and opens the trunk while the vehicle is standing or driving Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Illumination of the emergency release but Separately locking the trunk gt Close the trunk lid gt page 89 ton Pull the mechanical key out of the e The button will blink for 30 minutes af i SmartKey gt page 285 ter opening the trunk To deny any unauthorized person ac gt Insert the mechanical key in the trunk cess to the trunk lock it separately lid lock with the mechanical key Leave only the SmartKey less its mechanical key Turn the key completely to the right to e The button will blink for 60 minutes af ter closing the trunk Hi with the vehicle pos
130. d or reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the en gine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Warning When the selector lever is in position D you can influence transmission shifting by e limiting the gear range e changing gears yourself gearsh Even with an automatic transmission you can change the gears yourself when the selector lever is in position D Downshifting gt Briefly press the selector lever to the left in the D direction The transmission will shift from the current gear to the next lower gear This action si multaneously limits the gear range of the transmission gt page 140 A On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi cle control Your vehicle s ABS will not pre vent this type of loss of control Warning i To avoid overrewing the engine when the selector lever is moved to the D direction the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if the engine s max speed would be exceeded Upshifting gt Briefly press the selector lever to the right in the D direction The transmission will shift from the current gear to the next higher gear as permitted by the shift program This action simulta neously extends the gear range of the transmission Controls in detail Autom
131. d use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Do not leave children unattended in the ve hicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could open the driver s door and unintentionally activate the easy entry exit feature which could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Controls in detail Seats You can activate the following functions e Steering column Only the steering column is adjusted e Steering column and seat The steering column and the seat are adjusted The easy entry exit feature can be switched on or off in the individual setting menu CONVENIENCE EASY ENTRY FEATURE ACTIVATE gt page 129 i To cancel seat steering wheel move ment do one of the following e press seat adjustment switch gt page 28 e move steering column stalk gt page 32 e press memory switch gt page 28 Controls in detail Seats Head restraints Front seat head restraints manual seat Information on head restraint adjustment can be found in the Getting started sec tion gt page 32 Warning A A For your protection drive only with properly positioned head restraints P91 16 2163 31 Adjust head restraint to support the back of the head approximately at ear level Removing front head restraints Do not drive the vehicle without the seat gt Pull head restraint to its highest posi head restraints Head restraints a
132. d vehicle It is possible for chil dren to open a locked door from the inside which could result in an accident and or serious injury Warning Controls in detail Locking and unlocking If you can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle with the key then either the batteries in the SmartKey are dis charged the key is malfunctioning or the vehicle battery is drained e Check the batteries in the key gt page 86 and replace them if necessary gt page 286 e Use the mechanical key to lock and unlock the doors gt page 285 and the trunk lid gt page 91 as re quired e Check the vehicle battery gt page 303 If the key is malfunctioning contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Checking the batteries gt Press button or a Battery check lamp 5 lights up briefly to indicate that the key batteries are in order If battery check lamp 5 does not light up briefly during check then the key batteries are discharged Replace the batteries gt page 286 You can obtain the required batteries at any authorized Mercedes Benz Cen ter Unlocking the trunk lid You can unlock the trunk separately A minimum height clearance of 5 75 ft 1 75 m is required to open the trunk lid gt Press button until trunk opens The trunk lid swings open upwards au tomatically Always make sure that there is sufficient overhead clearance The trunk can also be opened from its in side in an emergen
133. dels C 32 AMG Capacity 0 5 US qt 0 46 I approx 0 62 US qt 0 59 I approx 1 1 US qt 1 0 I approx 2 1 oz 60 g each 0 5 US qt 0 5 approx 8 5 US qt 8 0 approx 6 8 US qt 6 4 I approx 6 8 US qt 6 4 I approx 15 3 US qt 14 5 I 16 4 US gal 62 01 2 1 US gal 8 0 I Fuels coolants lubricants etc Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90 MB Automatic Transmission Oil MB Power Steering Fluid Pentosin CHF 11S High temperature roller bearing grease MB Brake Fluid DOT 4 MB 325 0 Anticorrosion antifreeze agent Premium unleaded gasoline Posted Octane 91 Avg of 96 RON 86 MON Flexible Fuel Vehicle MY 2003 Mercedes Benz C 320 models except those equipped with manual transmission or 4MATIC Alternative fuel Ethanol fuel E85 Model Air conditioning system Windshield washer system Without headlamp cleaning system With headlamp cleaning system Capacity 3 2 US qt 3 0 1 6 4 US qt 6 0 1 Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Fuels coolants lubricants etc R 134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant oil never R 12 MB Windshield Washer Concentrate 1 Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent antifreeze for temperatures below freezing Follow suggested mixing ratios gt page 338 Technical data
134. dequate control reach and comfort The head restraint should also Steering wheel position be adjusted for proper height Also see airbag section gt page 57 for proper seat positioning Do not activate the memory function while driving Activating the memory function e Drivers seat and backrest position while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle e Drivers side exterior rear view mirror position e Passenger side exterior rear view mir In addition adjust the steering wheel to ror position ensure adequate control reach opera tion and comfort Both the inside and Front passenger seat position outside rear view mirrors should be ad These key dependent memory settings justed for adequate rear vision can be deactivated if desired gt page 99 Fasten seat belts Infants and small children should be seated in a properly secured restraint system that complies with U S Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210 2 The memory button and stored position button are located on the door P54 25 2950 31 1 Memory button 2 Stored position button gt Make sure that the ignition is switched on or the relevant door is open and the SmartKey is inserted in the starter switch Storing positions into memory gt Adjust the seats steering wheel and rear view mirrors to the desired posi tion gt page 32 gt Turn button 2
135. detail Control system The menus are described on the following pages Controls in detail Control system Menus This is what you will see when you scroll The table on the next page provides an through the menus overview of the individual menus 149 8 miles B26753 72 F 10 30a 72 F AFTER START 0007S mi 1 38h 50 meh 21 4 mes 72 F 10 30a ETLE 10 30a SETTINGS CAN BE RESET WITH RESET BUTTON 72 F 10 30a MO MALFUNCTION EEF 10 30a P54 30 6571 31 Menus submenus and functions Commands submenus Menu 1 Standard dis play Coolant temper ature display Digital speedom eter Call up FSS Check engine oil level Menu 2 AUDIO Select radio station Operate CD player Operate casette player Menu 3 NAVI Activate route guidance Menu 4 Malfunction memory Call up malfunc tion messages Controls in detail Menu 5 Settings Reset to factory settings Instrument clus ter submenu Lighting sub menu Vehicle submenu Convenience submenu Menu 6 Trip computer Fuel consump tion statistics after start Fuel consump tion statistics since the last reset Call up range Control system Menu 7 Telephone Load phone book Search for name in phone book Controls in detail Control system i The headings used in the menus table are designed to facilitate navi
136. dicator and warning Warning sounds Drivers seat belts 61 Parking brake 46 Warranty coverage 317 Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid Washing the vehicle 249 Wear pattern tires 244 Weights 328 Wheel change Tightening torque 301 Wheels Rotating 244 Tires and wheels 242 Window curtain airbags 61 Windows see Side windows Windshield Defogging 151 159 Refilling washer fluid 241 Replacing wiper blades 296 Washer fluid 241 338 Washer system 338 Windshield washer fluid 338 Message in display 278 Mixing ratio 338 Refilling 241 Wiping with 49 Windshield washer system 338 Windshield wipers 48 Fast wiper speed 48 Replacing wiper blades 296 Single wipe 49 Switching on 48 Wiping with windshield washer fluid 49 Winter driving 245 Block heater 246 Snow chains 246 Tires 245 Transmission program mode Winter driving instructions 228 Winter tires 245 Wiper blades Cleaning 251 Installing 296 Removing 296 Replacing 296 Replacing insert 296 Wiping Interval 48 With windshield washer fluid 49 X Xenon headlamps Bi Xenon 341 Service and Literature Your authorized Mercedes Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes Benz parts to service your vehicle properly For expert advice and quality service see your authorized Mercedes Benz Center If your are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle please contact your authorized Mercedes Benz Center We consider this the best way
137. display field Minor service A Major service B ne T T A SERVICE A lie IN SOO MILES 7 JE N D 10 30a 22 F P54 30 6567 31 The interval between services depends on your driving habits A gentle driving style moderate engine speeds and the avoidance of short distance trips will lengthen the interval between services Operation Maintenance Clearing the service indicator The service indicator is automatically cleared e after ten seconds when you switch on the ignition or when reaching the ser vice threshold while driving e after 30 seconds once the suggested service term has passed You can also clear it yourself gt Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster gt page 22 Service term exceeded If you have exceeded the suggested ser vice term you will see the following mes sage in the multifunction display SERVICE A EXCEEDED BY XX DAYS SERVICE A EXCEEDED BY XX MILES KM The Mercedes Benz Center will reset the service indicator following a completed service Operation Maintenance Calling up the service indicator gt Switch ignition on The standard display of the control sys tem appears gt page 116 gt Press button R or J on the mul tifunction steering wheel until the FSS indicator appears in the multifunction display i If the battery is disconnected the days of disconnection will not be included in the count
138. ds 195 Cruise control lever 193 Cruising range fuel 335 Cup holder Cleaning 252 In front seat armrest In rear seat armrest Opening 204 Customer Assistance Center CAC D Daytime running lamp mode Setting 125 Deactivating Air conditioner 154 Air recirculation mode Alarm 80 Anti theft alarm system 80 Automatic climate control 157 Central locking control system Climate control 149 Climate control system Cruise control 194 Defrosting 152 160 Engine with the key 53 ESP 76 Exterior lamps 102 Exterior lamps delayed shut off Front foglamps 126 204 205 341 103 152 161 162 129 153 126 Hazard warning flasher 104 Headlamps 52 Interior lighting delayed shut off Rear window defroster 153 162 Seat heater 97 Tow away alarm 80 Deep water see Standing water Defogging Windshield 151 159 Defrosting 151 160 Delayed shut off 127 229 Exterior lamps 126 Interior lighting 127 Dialing A number telephone 135 Difficulties While driving see Problems while driving 49 With starting 45 Digital speedometer 116 Direction of rotation tires Discharged battery Jump starting 306 Disconnecting Vehicle battery 304 243 Display elements Audio system Displays Digital speedometer Messages 238 261 Selecting 124 Service indicator 247 Showing malfunctions Distance to empty range Callingup 132 Door control panel 28 166 116 119 Door entry lamps 106 Door handle 28 Door
139. e sponsibility is to drive the vehicle A driver s attention to the road must always be his her primary focus when driving For your safety and the safety of others we rec ommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a tele phone call If you choose to use the telephone while driving please use the hands free device and only use the telephone when road weather and traffic conditions permit Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle Only operate the COMAND Cockpit Man agement and Data System if road weather and traffic conditions permit Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of approx 44 feet ap proximately 13 5 m every second Observe all legal requirements Controls in detail Useful features You can take and place telephone calls us Tele Aid ing the and buttons on the steering wheel To carry out other tele phone functions use the control system gt page 111 See separate operating manual for instruc tions on how to use the telephone Warning A Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a ve hicle Whether or not prohibited by law for safety reasons the driver should not use the cellular telephone while the vehicle is in mo tion Stop the vehicle in a safe location before an s
140. e 42 With the SmartKey removed and the driver s door open a warning sounds if the vehicle s exterior lamps are not switched off Warning A To prevent possible personal injury always keep hands and fingers away from the door openings when closing the doors Be espe cially careful when small children are around Before closing doors make sure that there is no possibility of someone getting caught in a door during closing Getting started Parking and locking gt After exiting the vehicle press the lock button on the key gt page 30 The locking knobs on the doors move down Warning A When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the starter switch and lock your vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equip ment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury More information can be found in the Controls in detail section gt page 84 Safety and Security Occupant safety Panic alarm Driving safety systems Anti theft systems Safety and Security Occupant safety In this section you will learn the most im portant facts about the restraint systems of the vehicle The restraint systems are e Seat belts e Emergency tensioning device e Airbags e Child seats e Child seat recognition e Lower anchors and tethers for children LATCH As independent systems th
141. e air stream will cool down the brakes faster Driving off Apply the brakes to test them briefly after driving off Perform this procedure only when the road is clear of other traffic Warm up the engine smoothly Do not place full load on the engine until the oper ating temperature has been reached When starting off on a slippery surface do not allow one drive wheel to spin for an ex tended period with the ESP switched off Doing so may cause serious damage to the drive train which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear Operation Driving instructions Parking Set the parking brake whenever park ing or leaving the vehicle In addition move selector lever to position P man ual transmission first or reverse gear In addition when parking on hills always turn front wheels towards road curb Operation Driving instructions Tires The tread wear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread Warning A Warning A Do not park this vehicle in areas where com bustible materials such as grass hay or Warning A leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re sult of vehicle movement before turning
142. e in an emergency 216 With the SmartKey 30 Upgrade signals Tele Aid 215 Uphill driving Cruise control 194 Upshifting 139 Useful features 203 Ashtrays 207 Cigarette lighter 208 Garage door opener 217 Tele Aid 209 Telephone 208 Vv Vehicle Individual settings 119 121 Locking 25 Locking in an emergency 286 Lowering 301 Performance in cold weather 335 Performance in hot weather 335 Proper use of 16 Service battery 303 Towing 308 Unlocking 25 Unlocking in an emergency 285 With flexible fuel 334 Vehicle battery 303 Vehicle care 249 Cup holder 252 Engine cleaning 250 Gear selector lever 252 Hard plastic trim items 252 Headlamps 251 Instrument cluster 252 Leather upholstery 253 Light alloy wheels 252 MB Tex upholstery 253 Ornamental moldings 251 Paintwork 250 Plastic and rubber parts 252 Power washer 250 Seat belts 252 Steering wheel 252 Taillamps 251 Tar stains 250 Turn signals 251 Vehicle washing 251 Window cleaning 251 Wiper blades 251 Vehicle identification number VIN 318 Vehicle jack 280 Vehicle lighting Checking 234 Vehicle tool kit 279 Alignment bolt 279 Removing 279 Spare fuses 279 Special fuse puller 279 Towing eye bolt 279 Vehicle jack 279 Wheel bolts 279 Wheel wrench 279 Vehicle washing 251 Ventilated storage compartment 155 Ventilation Storage compartment 155 VIN Vehicle Identification Number 318 345 Voice control system 345 Hands free microphone 27 W Warning lamps see Lamps in
143. e not tested or recom mended by Mercedes Benz since previous damage cannot always be recognized on retreads Mercedes Benz can therefore not assure the operating safety of the vehi cle when such tires are used See your authorized Mercedes Benz Cen ter for information on tested and recom mended rims and tires for summer and winter operation Important guidelines Use only sets of tires and rims of the same type and make Tires must be of the correct size for the rim Break in new tires for approximately 60 miles 100 km at moderate speeds Regularly check the tires and rims for damage If vehicle is heavily loaded check tire pressure and correct as required Do not allow your tires to wear down too far Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread depths under vr in 3 mm When replacing individual tires you should mount new tires on the front wheels first on vehicles with same sized wheels all around Life of tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven A Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Warning Keep unmounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Direction of rotation Unidirectional tires offer added advantag es
144. e protection of fered to properly belted occupants in certain frontal front airbags and side side impact airbags and window curtain airbags impacts which exceed preset deployment thresholds Safety and Security Occupant safety Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm against your neck or off your shoul der In a crash your body would move too far forward That would increase the chance of head and neck injuries The belt would also apply too much force to the ribs or abdomen which could se verely injure internal organs such as your liver or spleen Never wear belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing such as eyeglasses pens keys etc as these might cause injuries Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips and not across the abdo men If the belt is positioned across your abdomen it could cause serious injuries in a crash Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another per son or other objects Belts should not be worn twisted In a crash you wouldn t have the full Safety and Security Occupant safety width of the belt to manage impact forces The twisted belt against your body could cause injuries e Pregnant women should also use a lap shoulder belt The lap belt portion should be positioned as low as possible on the hips to avoid any possible pres sure on the abdomen e Never place y
145. e the two piece wheel wrench and the jack out of the trunk gt page 279 Assemble wheel wrench Practical hints Flat tire A The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack take up brackets built into both sides of the vehicle To help avoid personal injury use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack Keep hands and feet away from the area under the lifted vehicle Always firmly set parking brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with jack Warning Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is raised Be certain that the jack is always vertical plumb line when in use es pecially on hills Always try to use the jack on level surface Make sure that the jack arm is fully seated in the jack take up bracket Always lower the vehicle onto suffi cient capacity jackstands before working under the vehicle gt D Practical hints Flat tire en A The jack take up brackets are located di i rectly behind the front wheel housings and in front of the rear wheel housings P40 10 2705 31 P40 10 2766 31 Wheel cover on vehicles with steel rims gt On wheel to be changed loosen but do Canada only not yet remove the wheel bolts gt On wheel to be changed remove wheel approximately one full turn with P40 10 2767 31 cover by reaching into two openings of wrench gt Place jack on firm ground
146. e tray Removing the spare wheel gt Remove tool kit 1 gt Turn storage tray 3 counterclockwise gt Remove spare wheel 2 Practical hints Where will I find Storing the spare wheel Spare wheel bolts Warning gt Place spare wheel 2 in wheel well 8 A gt Turn storage tray 3 clockwise to its Be sure to use the original length wheel stop to secure the spare wheel bolts when remounting the original wheel Insert toolkit 1 after it has been repaired m Vehicles with Minispare wheel a e E The Minispare wheel is located in the tunkand lower trunk Hoar before pao 10 277031_ compartment underneath the trunk floor closing the trunk lid 1 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims 2 Wheel bolt for steel rims H Wheel bolts 2 must be used when mounting steel wheel rim The use of any wheel bolts other than wheel bolts 2 for steel wheel rims can cause physical damage to the vehicle r 1 Vehicle tool kit Wheel wrench Jack 2 Arrow 3 Minispare wheel 4 Vehicle tool kit storage well casing Removing the Minispare wheel gt gt Lift trunk floor cover and engage trunk floor handle in upper edge of trunk Loosen the retaining screw gt page 279 in the middle of storage well casing Remove the storage well casing Remove vehicle tool kit storage well casing 4 Remove Minispare wheel 3 Storing the Minispare wheel gt gt Place Minispare wheel 3 in wheel well Place vehicle tool kit stor
147. eatedly until you see the malfunction message memory in the display No malfunction messages If no malfunctions have occured the message in the display is NO MALFUNCTION Malfunctions have occurred If malfunctions have occurred you will see the number of malfunctions in the display gt Press button RA or Bag The stored messages will now be dis played in order See the Practical hints section for malfunction and warning messages gt page 261 Should any malfunctions occur while driving the number of malfunctions will reappear in the display when the key in the starter switch is turned to position O or removed from the starter switch i The message memory will be cleared when you turn the key in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 You will then only see high priority messages in the multifunction display gt page 261 Controls in detail Control system Settings menu In the SETTINGS menu there are two functions e The function RESET TO FACTORY SETTINGS with which you can reset all the settings to the original factory settings e Acollection of submenus with which you can make individual settings for your vehicle gt Press button or repeatedly until the SETTINGS menu is seen in the display SETTINGS RESET WITH RESET BUTTON 72 F Controls in detail Control system Resetting all settings You can reset all the functions of all sub menus to the fac
148. ecautions when handling automotive batteries Risk of explosion Keep flames or sparks away from battery Do not smoke Battery acid is caustic Do not allow it to come into contact with skin eyes or clothing In case it does immediately flush affected area with clear water and seek medical help if necessary Wear eye protection E Keep children away Follow the instructions in this Operator s Manual Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling Operation Engine compartment Windshield washer system and Always use washer solvent antifreeze headlamp cleaning system where temperatures may fall below errrree freezing Failure to do so could result in Fluid for the windshield washer system and damage to the washer system reser the headlamp cleaning system is supplied voir from the windshield washer reservoir It has a capacity of Warning A e Vehicles without headlamp cleaning system approx 3 2 US qt 3 0 I Washer solvent antifreeze is highly flam mable Do not spill washer solvent antifreeze on hot engine parts because it e Vehicles with headlamp cleaning system approx 6 4 US qt 6 0 I may ignite You could be seriously burned wg During all seasons add MB Windshield f a Washer Concentrate S to wa
149. ed Mercedes Benz Center will provide you with additional information Premium unleaded gasoline To maintain the engine s durability and performance premium unleaded gaso line must be used If premium unleaded is not available and low octane fuel is used follow these precautions e Have the fuel tank only partially filled with unleaded regular and fill up with premium unleaded as soon as possible e Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration e Do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such as two per sons and no luggage e Do not exceed we of maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous terrain Fuel requirements Flexible Fuel Vehicles MY 2003 Mercedes Benz C 320 models except those equipped with manual transmis sion or 4 MATIC system are designed to operate on premium unleaded gasoline or Ethanol fuel E85 or any mixture of these two See notes on Flexible Fuel Vehicles gt page 334 Use only premium unleaded meeting ASTM standard D 439 e The octane number posted at the pump must be 91 min It is an average of both the Research R octane num ber and the Motor M octane number R M 2 This is also known as the ANTI KNOCK INDEX Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as Ethanol IPA IBA and TBA can be used provided
150. ed above the in side rear view mirror The Roadside Assistance button and the Information button are located below the center armrest cover Shortly after the completion of your Ac quaintance Call you will receive a user ID and password via first call mail By visiting www mbusa com and selecting Tele Aid USA only you will have access to account information remote door unlock and more mi The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular network for communication and the GPS Global Positioning System satel lites for vehicle location If either of these signals are unavailable the Tele Aid system may not function and if this occurs assistance must be sum moned by other means System self check Initially after turning the key in starter switch to position 2 malfunctions are de tected and indicated the indicator lamps in the SOS button the Roadside Assis tance button and the Information button stay on longer than ten sec onds or do not come on The message TELE AID VISIT WORKSHOP appears for approx ten seconds in the multifunction display Warning A If the indicator lamps in the SOS button in the Roadside Assistance button and or in the Information button do not come on during the system self check or if any of these indicators remain illuminated constantly in red and or the message TELE AID VISIT WORKSHOP is displayed in the multifunction display after the system self check
151. ed activation of the SRS In addition through improper work there is a risk of rendering the SRS inop erative or causing unintended airbag de ployment Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by an au thorized Mercedes Benz Center For your protection and the protection of others when scrapping the airbag unit or emergency tensioning device our safety instructions must be fol lowed These instructions are available from your authorized Mercedes Benz Center Given the considerable deployment speed and the textile structure of the airbags there is the possibility of abra sions or other injuries resulting from air bag deployment When you sell your vehicle we strongly urge you to give notice to the subsequent owner that it is equipped with an SRS by alerting them to the applicable section in the Operator s Manual Front airbags P91 60 2596 31 1 Driver airbag 2 Passenger airbag Driver and passenger airbags are deployed e inthe event of a frontal impact e if impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold e independently of the side impact air bags The airbags will not deploy in impacts which do not exceed the system s deploy ment thresholds You will then be protect ed by the fastened seat belts The front passenger airbag will only be de ployed if e the front passenger seat is occupied e the indicator lamp in the center console is not lit gt page 67 Do not place objects heavie
152. eeeeee 51 Switching off headlamps 52 Turning off engine 53 LIS o oo ee eeeeceeeecceeseceseseeeeeseeeenee 101 Safety and Security 55 Controls in detail eee 83 Exterior lamp switch c60 101 Occupant safety 56 Locking and unlocking 84 Combination switch 00 104 AIPDA RS si cssiescesstses rnrn innisis 57 KEYS vciccsdcvsreivesvicsiers ts cheveate i 84 Hazard warning flasher 104 Seat DENS wis cccsscsccaveentesedessvscvsteesecves 61 Opening the doors from the inside 87 Interior lighting seee 105 Children in the vehicle 65 Opening the trunk from the inside 88 Door entry lamps cceeeeeeees 106 Blocking of rear door window Opening the trunk ee 88 Trunk lamp 106 OPCatlON ssevecesisecssasseceveossavecezceasesecs 71 Closing the trunk 89 Instrument cluster cccceeseeseeeeee 107 Panic alarm ooo eeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeees 72 Trunk lid emergency release 89 Instrument cluster illumination 107 Activating serune 72 Separately locking the trunk 90 Coolant temperature display 108 Deactivating oo eee cee eereeeees 72 Separately unlocking the trunk 91 Trip odometer cceeceeeeeeeseeees 109 Driving safety systems 73 Automatic central locking 91 TaChome tel cccccssssecceeesseeeees 109 ABS scceutscarssvanteaziveceaseiosuvcvccesivecectees 73 Locking and unlocking Outside te
153. ehi cle If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle this section will be of particular interest to you To quickly familiarize yourself with the ba sic functions of the vehicle refer to the Getting started section of this manual The corresponding page numbers are giv en at the beginning of each segment Locking and unlocking Information on locking and unlocking can be found in the Getting started section on gt page 30 and gt page 51 Keys Your vehicle comes supplied with two SmartKeys with remote controls and a re movable mechanical key The locking tabs for the mechanical key portion of the two keys are a different color to help distin guish each key unit The SmartKey provides an extended oper ating range To prevent theft however it is advisable to only unlock the vehicle when you are in close proximity to it The Smartkey centrally locks and unlocks e the doors e the trunk e the fuel filler flap i You can also open and close the power windows gt page 188 and slid ing pop up roof gt page 191 using the SmartKey P80 35 2087 31 SmartKey with remote control 1 Lock button 2 Unlock button for the trunk lid 3 Mechanical key locking tab 4 Unlock button 5 Battery check lamp 6 Panic button gt page 72 Canada only Only vehicles equipped with an anti theft alarm system have SmartKeys with integrated panic button 6 To prev
154. ehicle with the selector lever not fully engaged in position P is dan gerous Also position P alone is not intend ed to or capable of preventing your vehicle from moving possibly hitting people or ob jects Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P gt page 51 When parked on an incline turn the front wheels towards the road curb Controls in detail Automatic transmission Warning VAN When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could move the selector lever from position P which could result in an accident and or serious injury Program mode selector switch 1 Program mode selector switch S Standard For regular driving W Winter For winter driving H Never change the program mode when the selector lever is out of position P It could result in a change of driving char acteristics for which you may not be prepared gt Press the program mode selector switch repeatedly until the letter of the desired shift program appears in the multifunction display gt page 111 Select W for winter driving e The vehicle starts out in second gear both forward and reverse for gentler starts This does not apply if full throttle is applied or gear range 1 is selected e Traction and driving stability are im pr
155. eir protective effects work in conjunction with each other i For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and re straint systems for infants and chil dren see Children in the vehicle gt page 65 Occupant safety The EY warning lamp in the instrument cluster gt page 22 lights up e for about four seconds when you turn the key in the starter switch to position 1 e for about four seconds when you start the engine by turning the key i The warning lamp remains lit if the key is turned to position 2 and left there The warning lamp will go out when you start the engine The warning lamp goes out shortly after you start the engine This shows that the restraint systems are operational A malfunction in the system has been detected if the E9 warning lamp e fails to extinguish after approximately four seconds e does not come on at all e comes on after the engine was started or while driving For safety reasons we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately to have the system checked More information can be found in the Practical hints section gt page 257 Warning A In the event that the SRS malfunction indica tor lamp lights up during driving or does not come on at all the SRS may not be opera tional For your safety we strongly recom mend that you visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediatel
156. eld wipers checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Getting started Problems while driving The engine runs erratically and misfires e An ignition cable may be damaged e The engine electronics may not be op erating properly e Unburned gasoline may have entered the catalytic converter and damaged it Give very little gas Have the problem repaired by an au thorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Getting started Driving The coolant temperature is over 248 F 120 C The coolant is too hot and is no longer cooling the engine gt Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and turn off the engine Allow engine and coolant to cool gt Check the coolant level and add cool ant if necessary gt page 238 In case of accident If the vehicle is leaking gasoline gt Do not start the engine under any cir cumstances gt Notify local fire and or police authori ties If the extent of the damage cannot be de termined gt Notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center If no damage can be determined on the e major assemblies e fuel system e engine mount gt Start the engine in the usual manner Parking and locking You have now completed your first drive You have properly stopped and parked your vehicle End your drive as follows Warning A Wait until the vehicle is stationary before re moving the key from the starter switch The vehicle cannot be
157. em enables you to e call up information about your vehicle e change vehicle settings For example you can use the control system to find out when your vehicle is next due for service to set the language for messages in the instrument cluster display and much more e The displays for the audio systems radio CD player cassette player will appear in English regardless of the language selected Warning A A driver s attention to the road and traffic conditions must always be his her primary focus when driving For your safety and the safety of others selecting features through the multifunction steering wheel should only be done by the driver when traffic and road conditions permit it to be done safely Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet approximately 13 5 m every second The control system relays information to the multifunction display Controls in detail Control system Multifunction display 1 Outside temperature 2 Main odometer 3 Trip odometer 4 Automatic transmission program mode 5 Current gear selector lever position 6 Digital clock Controls in detail Control system Multifunction steering wheel The displays in the multifunction display and the settings in the control system gt page 111 are controlled by the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel Multifunction display
158. ency Locking the vehicle If you are unable to lock the vehicle with the SmartKey lock it with the mechanical key as follows gt Close the passenger doors and the trunk gt Press the central locking switch in the cockpit gt page 92 gt Check to see whether the locking knobs on the passenger doors are still visible If necessary push them down manually gt Lock the driver s door with the me chanical key gt page 285 gt Check if the trunk is locked If neces sary lock the trunk with the mechanical key gt page 90 Changing batteries If the batteries in the SmartKey are dis charged the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked It is recommended to have the batteries replaced at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center AN Keep the batteries out of reach of children Warning If a battery is swallowed seek medical help immediately Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling i When changing batteries always re place both batteries The required replacement batteries are available at any Mercedes Benz Center Practical hints Unlocking locking in an emergency SmartKey p P80 35 2075 31 P80 35 2134 31 3 Battery 1 Mechanical key 4 Contact spring 2 Battery compartment
159. enger com The interior lamps are switched off follow partment go out ing an adjustable time delay gt page 127 Controls in detail Lighting Switching right front reading lamp on and off gt Press button 2 The right reading lamp goes on gt Press button 2 again The right reading lamp goes off Switching left front reading lamp on and off gt Press button 6 The left reading lamp goes on gt Press button 6 again The left reading lamp goes off Switching all front interior lights on and off gt Press rocker switch in position 5 The interior lighting stays on while the rocker switch is pressed in gt Press rocker switch to position 3 or 4 The interior lighting goes out Door entry lamps The appropriate door entry lamp switches on if a door is opened in darkness and if the interior lighting is switched to automat ic function The entry lamp switches off automatically when the door is closed If you turn the key in the starter switch to position 0 and switch off the exterior headlamps the door entry lamps will remain lit for approximately five min utes Trunk lamp The trunk lamp switches on if the trunk lid is opened If you leave the trunk open for an extended period of time the trunk lamp will switch off automatically after approximately ten minutes Instrument cluster A full view illustration of the instrument cluster can be found in the At a glance
160. ent possible malfunction avoid exposing the key to high levels of elec tromagnetic radiation Factory setting Global unlocking gt Press button ES All turn signal lamps blink once The locking knobs in the doors move up The vehicle will lock again automatically within approximately 40 seconds of un locking if neither door nor trunk is opened the SmartKey is not inserted in the starter switch or the central locking switch is not activated Global locking gt Press button EEN All turn signal lamps blink three times The locking knobs in the doors move down Selective setting If you frequently travel alone you may wish to reprogram the key so that pressing only unlocks the driver s door and the fuel filler flap gt Press and hold buttons and simultaneously for about five seconds until battery check lamp 5 blinks twice The key will then function as follows Unlocking driver s door and fuel filler flap gt Press button once Global unlocking gt Press button twice Global locking gt Press button EEN Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Restoring to factory setting gt Press and hold buttons and simultaneously for about six seconds until battery check lamp 5 blinks twice A When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocke
161. entry using the number keys 1 to 0 gt Press the RCL key The telephone number stored under that entry will be dialed gt Press the SND key The call will be placed Speed dialing gt Input the desired entry number using the number keys 1 to 0 A maximum of two digits can be entered If necessary correct the last number entered with the CLR key gt Press the SND key The telephone number stored under that entry will be dialed The number L and the full entry number will be shown in the display Express dialing gt Press one of the desired number buttons 1 to 0 longer than one second The telephone number saved under that number will be dialed at KE Please be aware that button 1 might al ready be reserved for an emergency call number Emergency call gt Press button 1 longer than one second gt A call will be placed to the saved num ber e g 911 Please be aware that the 911 emergen cy call system is a public service Using it without due cause is a criminal of fense You can make an emergency call to an emergency rescue station with a mobile communications network The emergency call will be placed as long as the corresponding mobile communica tions network is available To do this switch the telephone on if not already done so The call will also be placed if the un lock code is not entered Controls in detail Audio system Emergency calls may not
162. er removed More information on brake fluid can be found in the Technical data section gt page 332 Removing fuse box cover gt page 312 3 Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system For more information on refilling the reservoir see the Operation section gt page 241 Engine oil level More information on engine oil can be found in the Operation section gt page 236 Opening hood gt page 235 Coolant For normal replenishing use water pota ble water quality More information on coolant can be found in the Operation section gt page 238 Vehicle lighting Check function and cleanliness For more information on replacing light bulbs see the Practical hints section gt page 290 Exterior lamp switch gt page 101 Tire inflation pressure More information on tire inflation pressure can be found in the Operation section gt page 243 Engine compartment Hood Warning AN Do not pull the release lever while the vehi cle is in motion Otherwise the hood could be forced open by passing air flow Opening ATAN 1 Hood release gt Pull lever 1 downwards The hood is unlocked and handle 2 will extend out of the radiator grill To avoid damage to the windshield wip ers or hood never open the hood if the wiper arms are folded forward away from the windshield 2 Handle for opening the hood gt Pull handle 2 to its st
163. es 1500 km you may gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds to the permissible maximum u Additional instructions for AMG vehicles e During the first 1000 miles 1500 km do not exceed a speed of 85 mph 140 km h e During this period avoid engine speeds above 4500 rpm in each gear All of the above instructions as may apply to your vehicle type also apply when driving the first 1000 miles 1500 km after the engine or the rear differential has been replaced i Always obey applicable speed limits Operation Driving instructions Driving instructions Drive sensibly save fuel Drinking and driving Pedals Fuel consumption to a great extent de pends on driving habits and operating con Warning A Warning A ditions To save fuel you should Keep tires at the recommended infla tion pressures Remove unnecessary loads Remove roof rack when not in use Allow engine to warm up under low load use Avoid frequent acceleration and decel eration Have all maintenance work performed at regular intervals by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Fuel consumption is also increased by driv ing in cold weather in stop and go traffic on short trips and in hilly country Drinking and driving and or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combina tions Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes perceptions and judgement The possibility of a serious or
164. es 315 Spare parts service ceeceeeeesseeeees 316 Warranty coverage 0 0 eee eeeeees 317 Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet ccee 317 Identification labels ccccsseeeeees 318 Layout of poly V belt drive 319 C 230 Kompressor Sport 319 C 240 C 320 all models 319 C 32 AMG isiscsscesecscsesiveestessercsevees 319 EMSING iss ceset ses soscsearaverteenveessemectetes sed 320 RIMS and TILOS ccecesececeeeesteeeeeeeee 322 Same size tires oo eeeeeeeeeceessteeees 323 Mixed size tires 324 Spare wheel ccccssecceessseeeeeees 325 Electrical system csccceeessseeeeeeee 326 Main dimensions ccccessseceeeees 327 Weight Sd E 328 Fuels coolants lubricants etc 329 C Capacities seterusna aranes 329 Technical termS eee 341 ENZING OllSicsscvessovetseceeicosegiovsenceses 332 Engine oil additives 0 0 0 332 Air conditioning refrigerant 899 INGEX cacti Seto A wi eaten 347 Brake fluid cccceceeessseceeseseeees 332 Premium unleaded gasoline 333 Fuel requirement ccccseseee 333 Gasoline additives cceeeees 334 Flexible Fuel Vehicles 006 334 Coolants aeon iiras reia 336 Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system 338 Consumer information c scceees 339 Uniform tire quality grading 339 Produc
165. especially in turns e Wet and slippery road surfaces e Following another vehicle too closely The ABS BAS ESP and 4MATIC cannot re duce this risk Always adjust your driving style to the pre vailing road and weather conditions Safety and Security Driving safety systems ABS Warning A Do not pump the brake pedal Use firm steady brake pedal pressure instead Pump ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS and significantly reduces braking effectiveness The ABS regulates the brake pressure so that the wheels do not lock during braking This allows you to maintain the ability to steer your vehicle The ABS is functional above a speed of ap proximately 5 mph 8 km h independent of road surface conditions At the instant one of the wheels is about to lock up a slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal indicating that the ABS is in the regulating mode Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake pedal while experi encing the pulsation Safety and Security Driving safety systems Continuous steady brake pedal pressure yields the advantages provided by the ABS namely braking power and ability to steer the vehicle On slippery road surfaces the ABS will re spond even with light brake pressure The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and func tions as a reminder to take extra care while driving i To alert following vehicles to slipper
166. ess ay aool2le SHO CLE END gt Enter the desired telephone number using buttons 1 to 0 The number can have up to 32 digits but only 17 of these are visible on the display gt If necessary correct the number en tered with the CLR key Press the key briefly to delete the last digit entered press the key and hold to delete the complete number gt After the correct telephone number has been entered press the SND key Controls in detail Audio system Telephone book Searching and calling up telephone book i The numbers stored in the telephone book entries by name A number of characters and symbols can be called up by either name or number mee cannot be shown on the display for Po NER technical reasons they have been re Calling up the telephone book eto aoe placed with spaces er p SMO HUM CLR END gt Press either the EN EA EI or B button gt Press the ABC key The current name is marked on the dis Switching between name search and play number search gt Press either the IEN or R button The stored entries are selected accord ing to alphabetical order of initial let ters gt Press the ABC key or The name search is called up gt Press the EXE or ERG button or The stored entries are selected in r increments of four Z eni Peal jE or SHO HUM CLE ENG gt Press the desired numerical key 2 to 9 gt Press the NUM key The stored entries are selected accord ing to alphabe
167. etween the front seats can be ventilated gt page 155 Information about Rear passenger com partment adjustable air vents gt page 155 Controls in detail Climate control Setting the temperature Warning A R The climate control is operational whenev er the engine is running You can operate the climate control system in either the au Use the temperature controls 2 and 3 tomatic or manual mode The system cools Follow the recommended settings for heat page 149 to separately adjust the air or heats the interior depending on the se ing and cooling given on the following pag temperature on each side of the passenger lected interior temperature and the cur es Otherwise the windows could fog up compartment You should raise or lower rent outside temperature impairing visibility and endangering youand the temperature setting in small incre others ments preferably starting at 72 F 22 C Nearly all dust particles pollutants and odors are filtered out before outside air en ters the passenger compartment through iJ Increasing the air distribution system If the vehicle interior is hot ventilate gt Turn the control slightly to the right The air conditioning will not engage no the interior before driving off The climate control system will corre cooling if the ACOFF mode is selected Keep the air intake grille in front of the spondingly adjust the interior air tem gt
168. eve may affect its safe operation we urge you to immediately contact your authorized Mercedes Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required If the matter is not handled to your satisfaction please discuss the problem with the Mercedes Benz Center management or if necessary contact us at one of the following addresses In the USA Customer Assistance Center Mercedes Benz USA LLC One Mercedes Drive Montvale NJ 07645 0350 In Canada Customer Relations Department Mercedes Benz Canada Inc 849 Eglinton Avenue East Toronto Ontario M4G 2L5 Introduction Reporting safety defects Reporting safety defects For the USA only The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49 Code of U S Federal Regulations Part 575 pursuant to the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966 Reporting Safety Defects If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Mercedes Benz USA LLC If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or Mercedes Benz USA LLC To contact NHTSA you may either
169. f ter the emergency call has been initiated When a voice connection is established the audio system mutes and the message TELE AID EMERGENCY CALL ACTIVE ap pears in the multifunction display The Re sponse Center will attempt to determine more precisely the nature of the accident provided they can speak to an occupant of the vehicle Controls in detail Useful features The Tele Aid system is available if it has been activated and is operation al Activation requires a subscription for monitoring services connection and cellular air time the relevant cellular phone network and GPS signals are available and pass the information on to the response cen ter i Location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from the GPS satellite network and pass the information on to the re sponse center A If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is il luminated continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an emergency call e g the rele vant cellular phone network is not available The message EMERGENCY CALL CALL FAILED appears in the multifunction display for approx ten seconds Warning Should this occur assistance must be sum moned by other means Initiating an emergency call manually gt P82 95 2369 31 1 Cover 2 SOS button Briefly press on cover 1 The cover
170. first gear For maximum use of engine s braking effect on very steep or lengthy downgrades Gear selector lever position Effect Park position Selector position when the vehicle is parked Only place selector lever in position P when vehicle is stopped The park position is not in tended to serve as a brake when the vehicle is parked Rather the driver should always set the park ing brake in addition to placing the selector lever in position P to se cure the vehicle The key can only be removed from the starter switch with the selector lever in position P With the key re moved the selector lever is locked in position P Effect Reverse gear Place selector lever in position R only when vehicle is stopped Neutral No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle When the brakes are released the vehicle can be moved freely pushed or towed To avoid damage to the transmis sion never engage N while driving If ESP is deactivated or malfunc tioning Only move selector lever to N if the vehicle is in danger of skidding e g on icy roads Drive The transmission shifts automati cally All five forward gears are available Controls in detail Automatic transmission Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason with selector lever in N can result in transmission damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Warning A Getting out of your v
171. free cloth when handling bulbs Your hands should be dry and free of oil and grease If the newly installed bulb does not light up visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Have the LEDs and bulbs for the follow ing lamps replaced by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center e Additional turn signal lamps in the exterior rear view mirrors e High mounted brake lamp e Xenon lamps e Front fog lamps Practical hints Replacing bulbs Replacing bulbs for front lamps gt Insert the new bulb so that the base locates in the recess on the holder Halogen headlamps gt Clip the retainer springs and plug the Os Die gt P82 10 3313 31 gt 4 Low beam headlamp bulb 5 High beam headlamp bulb gt A 6 Bulb socket for parking and standing gt lamp bulb 1 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp 2 Headlamp cover for high beam head Low and high beam bulb gt lamp parking and standing lamp i 3 Headlamp cover for low beam head gt Switch off the lights x lamp gt Open the hood gt page 235 gt Pressthe clamp and remove headlamp p cover 2 or 3 Pull electrical connector off Unclip the retainer springs and take out the bulb connector onto the bulb Align headlamp cover 2 or 3 and click into place Front turn signal lamp bulb Switch off the lights Open the hood gt page 235 Twist bulb socket 1 counterclockwise and pull out Push bulb into socket turn counter clockwise and remove
172. from 41 Ibs un til they reach a height where a lap shoulder belt fits properly without a booster Before installing the child seat make sure anchors 1 are folded out and locked in place Install child seat according to manufactur er s instructions The child seat must be firmly attached in the right and left side anchors 1 An incorrectly mounted child seat may come loose during an accident which could result in serious injury or death to your child Safety and Security Occupant safety Blocking of rear door window operation i For more information on power windows see the Controls in detail section gt page 187 Operation of the rear door windows with the switches located on the door control panel of the driver s door is still possible The override switch is located on the door control panel of the driver s door Warning A Activate the override switch when children are riding in the back seats of the vehicle The children may otherwise injure them selves e g by becoming trapped in the win dow opening 1 Override switch i When leaving the vehicle always remove the gt Slide override switch 1 to the right key from the starter switch and lock the ve The rear door windows can no longer hicle Do not leave children unattended in be operated using the switch located in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked the rear doors vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equip ment
173. g compartment 1 Opening The cup holder slides out gt Slide cover 1 rearward Closing cup holder The compartment contains a cigarette lighter gt page 208 a coin holder and gt Push the sliding compartment 1 back a j a cup holder gt page 204 until it engages Closing gt Slide cover 1 forward Controls in detail Useful features Armrest storage spaces Changing inclination of armrest Parcel net in front passenger footwell l i Pull up on armrest A small convenience parcel net is located in the front passenger footwell It is for y Lowering armrest small and light items such as road maps mail etc gt Pull handle 2 to lower armrest Warning A The storage compartment can be heat L ed or cooled Do not place heavy or fragile objects or ob jects having sharp edges in the parcel net ai o The compartment can get very warm Openihe compartment in armrest due to its confined space When storing In an accident during hard braking or sud PERTIS heat sensitive objects in the compart den maneuvers they could be thrown gt Lift armrest by handle 1 ment close the air vent gt page 155 around inside the vehicle and cause injury while heating the passenger compart to vehicle occupants Opening compartment under armrest ment gt Lift armrest by handle 2 H Closing Do not obstruct the air vent in the gt Lower armrest until it engages in lock storage compartment
174. g the operation of your ve hicle the nearest Mercedes Benz Center or Mercedes Benz USA products and ser vices is available to you For more details concerning the Tele Aid system please visit www mbusa com and use your ID and password sent to you sep arately to learn more USA only j 9 The indicator lamp in the Information button remains illuminated in red for approx ten seconds during the sys tem self check after turning key in the starter switch to position 2 together with the SOS button and the Roadside Assistance button Fy See system self check gt page 210 when the indicator lamp does not light up in red or stays on longer than ap proximately ten seconds If the indicator lamp in the Information button is illuminated continuous ly and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an Information call e g the relevant cellular phone network is not avail able The message INFO CALL FAILED appears in the multifunc tion display Information calls can be terminated us ing the button on the multifunc tion steering wheel If the indicator lamps do not start flash ing after pressing one of the buttons or remain illuminated in red at any time the Tele Aid system has detected a fault or the service is not currently ac tive and may not initiate a call Visit your Mercedes Benz Center and have the system checked or contact the Re
175. gation within the system and are not neces sarily identical to those shown in the control system displays The first function displayed in each menu will automatically show you which part of the system you are in Standard display menu You can select the functions in the stan dard display menu with button IRA or Zag The following functions are available Function Page Call up coolant temperature 108 display Call up digital speedometer see below Call up FSS 247 Check engine oil level 236 Display digital speedometer gt Press button Ea twice The current vehicle speed is shown in the multifunction display AUDIO menu The functions in the AUDIO menu operate the audio equipment which you currently have turned on If no audio equipment is currently turned on the message AUDIO OFF is shown in the display The following functions are available Function Page Select radio station 117 Operate CD player 117 Operate cassette player 118 Select radio station gt Turn on the radio gt page 168 Vehicles with COMAND Refer to separate operating instruc tions gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the currently tuned sta tion in the display Johnie 1 Station frequency 2 Waveband setting 3 Setting for station selection using memory Press button R or Ea repeatedly until the desired station is found The type of search depends on the setting for the station tuning
176. gine gasoline injection 4 3 23 in 82 00 mm 3 35 in 85 00 mm 109 6 cu in 1796 cm 8 5 1 189 hp 5800 rpm 141 kW 5800 rpm 192 ft lb 3500 rpm 260 Nm 3500 rpm 6000 rpm 1 3 4 2 7 ft 11 in 2420 mm C 240 203 061 C 240 4MATIC 203 081 112 4 stroke engine gasoline injection 6 3 54 in 89 90 mm 2 68 in 68 20 mm 158 5 cu in 2597 cm 10 5 1 167 hp 6000 rpm 125 kW 6000 rpm 177 ft lb 4500 rpm 240 Nm 4500 rpm 6200 rpm 1 4 3 6 2 5 7 ft 10 in 2390 mm The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment Model Engine Mode of operation No of cylinders Bore Stroke Total piston displacement Compression ratio Output acc to SAE J 1349 Maximum torque acc to SAE J 1349 Maximum engine speed Firing order Poly V belt C 320 203 064 C 320 4MATIC 203 084 C 320 Sport 203 064 C 320 4MATIC Sport 203 084 112 4 stroke engine gasoline injection 6 3 54 in 89 90 mm 3 31 in 84 00 mm 195 2 cu in 3199 cm 10 1 214 hp 5700 rpm 160 kW 5700 rpm 229 ft lb 3000 rpm 310 Nm 3000 rpm 6000 rpm 1 4 3 6 2 5 7 ft 10 in 2390 mm Technical data Engine C 32 AMG 203 065 112 4 stroke engine gasoline injection 6 3 54 in 89 90 mm 3 31 in 84 00 mm 195 2 cu in 3199 cm 9 1 348 hp 6100 rpm 260 kW 61
177. gt Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident BAS BRAKE ASSIST The charging voltage has fallen below ten When the voltage is above this value NOT AVAILABLE volts and the BAS has switched off again the BAS is operational again gt If necessary have the generator and battery checked Display BAS BRAKE ASSIST VISIT WORKSHOP DISPLAY DEFECTIVE VISIT WORKSHOP BATTERY ALTERNATOR VISIT WORKSHOP Practical hints What to do if Possible cause Suggested solution The BAS has detected a malfunction and gt Continue driving with added caution switched off The brake system is still functioning normally but without the BAS available Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident The BAS or the BAS display is gt Continue driving with added caution mealiuneinoning gt Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident The battery was charged with a battery Have the battery checked at a service charger or jump started station Practical hints What to do if Display Possible cause Suggested solution BATTERY ALTERNATOR The battery is no longer charging gt Stop immed
178. gt Press the T key The number of the track being played and the elapsed playing time appear in the display gt Press the T key again The total number of tracks and the total playing time of the CD appear in the display The CD main menu appears again after eight seconds Controls in detail Audio system Telephone operation Various car telephone functions and oper ating steps for the car telephone can be performed and displayed via the audio sys tem Further operating instructions not covered here can be found in the operating instruc tions for the multifunction steering wheel voice control system and the car tele phone Switching on the telephone gt Press the button gt If you have programmed an unlock code for the telephone you must input the code now gt Press the OK key The telephone is unlocked If you enter the wrong code you must re enter the correct code Switching off the telephone gt Press the button repeatedly until PHONE OFF appears in the display The receiving symbol in the display dis appears Adjusting the volume gt Turn control knob ROJ during tele phone operation The volume increases or decreases de pending on the direction in which the knob is turned The volume can be adjusted separately for the telephone voice control system and radio Placing a call Entering a telephone number and start ing the dialing proc
179. gt Turn off all electrical consumers gt Charge battery in accordance with the gt Open the hood gt page 235 instructions of the battery charger manufacturer gt Remove the filter box gt Reinstall the charged battery Follow gt Disconnect the battery negative the previously described steps in re lead 1 verse order gt Remove the cover 2 from the positive terminal Warning A Never charge a battery while still installed in gt Disconnect the battery positive lead Removing the battery the vehicle Gases may escape during charg ing and cause explosions that may result in gt Remove the screw nuts securing the paint damage corrosion or personal injury battery Remove the battery bracket Take out the battery Reconnecting the battery v v Turn off all electrical consumers Connect the positive lead and fasten its cover Connect the negative lead NEVER invert the terminal connections Reinstall the filter box gt page 303 The battery its filler caps and the vent tube must always be securely installed when the vehicle is in operation i The following procedures must be car ried out following any interruption of battery power e g due to reconnec tion e Set the clock gt page 120 Vehicles with COMAND see COMAND operator s manual e Resynchronize the front seat head restraints gt page 94 e Resynchronize the ESP gt page 75 e Resynchronize side
180. gt page 128 e The next stored station is selected SP e Station search i You can only store new stations using the corresponding feature on the radio gt page 173 Vehicles with COMAND Refer to separate operating instruc tions You can also operate the radio in the usual manner Controls in detail Control system Operate the CD player gt Turn on the radio and select the CD player gt page 178 Vehicles with COMAND Refer to separate operating instructions gt Press button or repeatedly until the settings for the CD currently being played are shown in the display 1 Current track 2 Current CD for CD changer gt Press button R or EN repeatedly until the desired track is selected i To select a CD from the magazine press a number on the audio system or the COMAND system key pad located in the center dashboard Controls in detail Control system Operate the cassette player gt Turn on the radio and select the Casette player gt page 174 Vehicles with COMAND Refer to separate operating instructions gt Press button or repeatedly until the settings for the cassette currently being played are shown in the display TAPE SIDE 1 72 F 10 30a P54 30 6574 31 _ Current side gt Press button J to fast forward to the next track gt Press button R to rewind the cassette to the beginning of the current track
181. h lights up Controls in detail Lighting i Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps and or the low beam headlamps on Fog lamps should only be used in conjunction with low beam headlamps Consult your State or Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding allow able lamp operation Switching on rear fog lamp gt Make sure that the low beam head lamps are switched on gt Pull out exterior lamp switch to second stop The yellow indicator lamp in the lamp switch lights up Controls in detail Lighting Combination switch High beam flasher gt Pull the combination switch briefly in The combination switch is located on the direction 2 left side of the steering column Hazard warning flasher The hazard warning flasher can be activat ed with the ignition switched on or off It is activated automatically when an airbag is deployed The switch is located on the center con sole 1 High beam 2 High beam flasher Switching on high beams gt Turn exterior lamp switch to position or to Bg gt page 101 gt Push the combination switch in direction 1 1 Hazard warning flasher switch The high beam symbol is illuminated on the instrument cluster Switching on the hazard warning flasher gt Press the hazard warning flasher switch All turn signals will blink e With the hazard warning flasher acti vated and the combination switch set for e
182. he built in remote control is capable of operating up to three separately controlled objects QP o 0o00 P68 00 3048 31 1 Indicator lamp 2 3 4 Signal transmitter key 5 Hand held remote control trans mitter Controls in detail Useful features A When programming a garage door opener the door moves up or down Warning When programming or operating the remote control make sure there is no possibility of anyone being injured by the moving door i Certain types of garage door openers are incompatible with the integrated opener If you should experience diffi culties with programming the transmit ter contact your authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Center in the USA only at 1 800 FOR MERCedes or Customer Service in Canada at 1 800 387 0100 i For operation in the USA only This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any inter ference received including interfer ence that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Programming or reprogramming the in tegrated remote control gt Turn key in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 Hold the end of the hand held transmit ter of the device you wish to tr
183. he doors gt Close the hood gt page 235 gt Close the trunk lid p gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible gt Remove the key from the starter switch gt Inthe control system set lamp operation to manual gt page 119 gt Switch on headlamps using the exterior lamp switch gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible p gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Display URN SIG HECK LA URN SIG HECK LA O4 O4 OH HECK LA TURN SIG CHECK LA URN SIG HECK LA URN SIG HECK LA RAKE LA ISIT WO RAKE LA HECK LA RAKE LA HECK LA e G es A eS Sl G S URN SIG AL LR PS AL RR PS IN MIRROR L PSI IN MIRROR R PS AL LF PS AL RF PS D SHOP Rai PS Pi IR PSI Possible cause The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning The left turn signal in the side mirror is malfunctioning This message will only appear if all light emitting diodes have stopped working The right turn signal in the side mirror is malfunctioning This message will only appear if all light emitting diodes have stopped working The left front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning The right front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning Brake l
184. he front passenger seat of your vehicle you must properly use a BabySmart child restraint which will turn off the passenger side front airbag BabySmart will not however turn off any side impact airbag It should be noted that with respect to both front and rear side impact airbags there is a possibility for a side airbag related injury if occupants especially children are not prop erly seated or restrained when next to a side airbag which needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job To help avoid the possibility of injury please follow these guidelines 1 Occupants especially children should never place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door where the side airbag inflates This could result in serious injuries or death should the side airbag be activated 2 Always sit upright properly use the seat belts and use an appropriately sized in fant or child restraint system for all chil dren 12 years old or under 3 Always wear seat belts properly If you believe that even with the use of these guidelines it would be safer for your rear seat occupants to have both rear door mounted side airbags deactivated then de activation can be accomplished upon your written request to do so at your authorized Mercedes Benz Center at an additional cost Please contact your local authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call our Customer Assistance Center at 1 800 FOR MERCedes 1 800 3
185. he manual or memory station selection mode for the radio gt page 117 gt Move the selection marker with the or E button to the VEHICLE submenu gt Press button EAN or repeatedly until you see this message in the display PRESS BUTTON IN AUDIO MODE The selection marker is on the current setting gt Press or E to select the desired station selection mode You can select e STATION SEARCH e MEMORY selects next stored station Setting automatic locking Use this function to activate or deactivate the automatic central locking With the automatic central locking system activated the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph 15 km h gt Move the selection marker with the or E button to the VEHICLE submenu gt Press button EAN or eg repeatedly until you see this message in the display AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK The selection marker is on the current setting AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK P54 30 6596 31 gt Press or E to switch AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK ON or OFF Convenience submenu Access the CONVENIENCE submenu via the SETTINGS menu Use the CONVENTENCE submenu to change the settings for a number of convenience features The following functions are available Function Page Activate easy entry see exit feature below Set key dependency 131 Set parking position for exterior 131 rear view mirror Activating easy entry exit feature Use this function to act
186. he passenger side exterior rear view mirror The mirror surface is convex outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view Objects in mirror are closer than they appear Check your in side rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes H Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle paint finish can be completely removed only while in the liquid state by applying plenty of water Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position Follow these steps to activate the mirror parking position so that the passenger side exterior rear view mirror will be turned downward to the stored position gt Make sure you stored a parking position for the passenger side exterior rear view mirror gt page 100 Make sure that the MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING function found under the CONVENIENCE submenu in the control system is switched to ON gt page 131 Switch on ignition Press button 3 gt page 39 for the pas senger side exterior rear view mirror Place the gear selector lever in reverse gear R The passenger side exterior rear view mirror will be turned downward to the stored position Controls in detail Good visibility The exterior rear view mirror returns to its previously stored driving position ten seconds after you put the gear selector lever out of position R immediately once you exceed a vehicle speed of approx 6 mph 10 km h immediately when you pres
187. he rear wheel brakes When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground the selector lever must be in position N manual transmission gears disengaged and the key must be in starter switch position 2 When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground or the front axle raised the vehicle may be towed only for distances up to 30 miles 50 km and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph 50 km h To be certain to avoid a possibility of damage to the drive train however we recommend the drive shaft be discon nected at the rear axle drive flange vehicles with 4MATIC disconnected at the front and rear axle drive flanges for any towing beyond a short tow to a nearby garage Warning A If circumstances require towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground always tow with a tow bar if e the engine will not run e there is a malfunction in the power supply or in the vehicle s electrical system as that will be necessary to adequately control the towed vehicle Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground make certain that the key is in starter switch position 2 If the key is left in starter switch position 0 for an extended period of time it can no longer be turned in the switch In this case the steering is locked To unlock remove key from starter switch and reinsert Practical hints Towing the vehicle i To signal turns while being towed with the hazard warning flas
188. he vehicle is in motion Information on fastening seat belts is found in the Getting started section gt page 41 e For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and re straint systems for infants and chil dren see Children in the vehicle gt page 65 Warning A Always fasten your seat belt before driving off Always make sure your passengers are properly restrained even those sitting in the rear and pregnant women Failure to wear and properly fasten and po sition your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident You and your passengers should always wear seat belts If you are ever in an accident your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled Without your seat belt buckled you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are properly wearing your seat belt Airbags can only protect as they are designed if the occupants are prop erly wearing their seat belts Warning A Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest reclined Sitting in an excessively reclined position can be dangerous You could slide under the seat belt in a collision If you slide under it the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck That could c
189. her in use turn key in starter switch to position 2 and activate the combination switch for the left or right turn signal in the usual manner only the selected turn signal will operate Upon canceling the turn signal the hazard warning flasher will operate again Practical hints Towing the vehicle z Karning A When towing the vehicle with all wheels i If the battery is disconnected or n the ground pl i With the engine not running there is no i E eee ulschanged power assistance for the braking and steer 5 e the key will not turn in the starter ing systems In this case it is important to With the automatic central locking switch See notes on the battery keep in mind that a considerably higher activated and the key in starter switch gt page 240 or on jump starting degree of effort is necessary to brake and position 2 the vehicle doors lock if the gt page 306 steer the vehicle Adapt your driving accord left front wheel as well as the right rear the selector lever willtemain ingly wheel are turning at vehicle speeds of locked in position P See notes on manual unlocking of gear selector Switch off the tow away alarm lever gt page 288 page 80 approx 9 mph 15 km h or more To prevent the vehicle doors from locking deactivate the automatic central locking gt page 129 Towing of the vehicle should only be done using the properly installed towing eye bolt Never attach tow ca
190. hould not be switched off during normal driving other than in the circum stances described below Disabling of the system will reduce vehicle stability in stan dard driving maneuvers To improve the vehicle s traction turn off the ESP in driving situations where it would be advantageous to have the drive wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip such as starting out on slippery surfaces and in deep snow in conjunction with snow chains in sand or gravel The switch is located on the center con sole 1 ESP off 2 ESP on gt Press upper half 1 of the ESP switch until the ESP warning lamp in the speedometer lights up ESP is deactivated If one or more drive wheels are spinning the ESP warning lamp in the speed ometer flashes regardless of the speed Traction control brakes a spinning wheel even when ESP is deactivated ESP always operates when you are brak ing even when it has been deactivated w Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period with the ESP switched off This may cause serious damage to the drive train which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Safety and Security Driving safety systems A Warning When the ESP warning lamp is illuminated continuously the ESP is switched off Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail ing road conditions and to the non operating status of the ESP Switching on the ESP gt Press lower half
191. iately and check the VISIT WORKSHOP Possible causes poly V belt e alternator malfunctioning If it is broken e broken poly V belt gt Do not continue to drive Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine Notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center If it is intact gt Drive immediately to the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Canada PARKING BRAKE You are driving with the parking brake Release the parking brake only RELEASE PARKING BRAKE set gt page 51 USA only Display Canada BRAKE PAD WEAR only VISIT WORKSHOP USA only BRAKE FLUID VISIT WORKSHOP Warning A Driving with this message displayed can re sult in an accident Have your brake system checked immediately Don t add brake fluid before checking the brake system Overfill ing the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire You can be se riously burned Possible cause The brake pads have reached their wear limit There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks Practical hints What to do if Suggested solution gt Have the brake pads replaced as soon as possible gt Risk of accident Stop the vehicle an
192. ible dead battery al ways remove the key from the starter switch Getting started Adjusting Adjusting Warning A All seat head restraint steering wheel and rear view mirror adjustments as well as fas tening of seat belts must be done before the vehicle is put into motion Seats The seats can be adjusted either manually or electrically depending on the vehicle s equipment Warning A Do not adjust the driver s seat while driving Adjusting the seat while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat back reclined Sitting in an excessively re clined position can be dangerous You could slide under the seat belt in a collision If you slide under it the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck That could cause serious or fatal injuries The seat back and seat belts provide the best restraint when the wearer is in an up right position and belts are properly posi tioned on the body Your seat must be adjusted so that you can correctly fasten your seat belt gt page 41 Never place hands under the seat or near any moving parts while a seat is being ad justed Warning A When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the starter switch and lock your vehicle The power seats can also be operated with the driver s or front passenger door open Do not leave children unattended in the ve hicle or with access to
193. ic transmission Wait for the gear selection process to complete before setting the vehicle in motion Release the brake pedal Carefully depress the accelerator Once the vehicle is in motion the auto matic central locking system engages and the locking knobs drop down i You can open a locked door from the inside Open door only when conditions are safe to do so Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear If you hear a warning signal when driv ing off you have forgotten to release the parking brake Release the parking brake After a cold start the automatic transmis sion engages at a higher revolution This al lows the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature earlier A On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi cle control Your vehicle s ABS will not pre vent this type of loss of control Warning Warning A Vehicles with automatic transmission It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the en gine is idling normally and when
194. icle has been treated at the facto ry with a wax base rustproofing in the body cavities which will last for the lifetime of the vehicle Post production treatment is neither necessary nor recommended by Mercedes Benz because of the possibility of incompatibility between materials used in the production process and others ap plied later We have selected car care products and compiled recommendations which are specially matched to our vehicles and which always reflect the latest technology You can obtain Mercedes Benz approved car care products at your authorized Mercedes Benz Center Operation Vehicle care Scratches corrosive deposits corrosion or damage due to negligent or incorrect care cannot always be removed or repaired with the car care products recommended here In such cases it is best to seek aid at your authorized Mercedes Benz Center The following topics deal with the cleaning and care of your vehicle and give important how to information as well as references to Mercedes Benz approved car care prod ucts Additional information can be found in the booklet Vehicle Care Guide Power washer When using a power washer for cleaning the vehicle always observe manufacturer s operating instructions Never use a round nozzle to power wash tires The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire Always replace a damaged tire Always keep the jet of water moving across the surfa
195. icle or personal injury to you or others Vehicle damage caused by fail ure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Your vehicle may have some or all of the equipment described in this manual Therefore you may find explanations for optional equipment not installed in your vehicle If you have any questions about the operation of any equipment your au thorized Mercedes Benz Center will be glad to demonstrate the proper proce dures We continuously strive to improve our product and ask for your understanding that we reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment Therefore infor mation illustrations and descriptions in this Operator s Manual might differ from your vehicle Optional equipment is also described in this manual including operating instruc tions wherever necessary Since they are special order items the descriptions and illustrations herein may vary slightly from the actual equipment of your vehicle If there are any equipment details that are not shown or described in this Operator s Manual your authorized Mercedes Benz Center will be glad to inform you of correct care and operating procedures The Operator s Manual and Service Book let are important documents and should be kept with the vehicle Service and warranty information The Service and Warranty Information Booklet contains detailed information about the warranties covering your Mer
196. iew mirrors before driving so that you have a good view of the road and traffic condi tions A In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte may escape the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks Warning Electrolyte has an irritating effect Do not al low the liquid to come into contact with eyes skin clothing or respiratory system In case it does immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary Inside rear view mirror gt Manually adjust the inside rear view mirror More information can be found in the Controls in detail section gt page 144 Exterior rear view mirror A Exercise care when using the passenger side exterior rear view mirror The mirror surface is convex outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view Objects in mirror are closer than they appear Check your in side rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes Warning Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle paint finish can only be completely removed while in their liq uid state by applying plenty of water Getting started Adjusting The buttons are located above the exterior lamp switch 1 Driver s side mirror 2 Adjustment button 3 Passenger side mirror gt Make sure that the ignition is switched on All the lights in the instrument cluster light up gt D Getting started Adjusting gt Press button 1 for the
197. if the outside temper ature is below approximately 41 F 5 C e after five minutes if the air conditioning is turned off e after 30 minutes if the outside temper ature is above approximately 41 F 5 C At outside temperatures above 79 F 26 C the system will not automatically switch back to outside air A quantity of outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes Rear window defroster The rear window defroster uses a large amount of power To keep the battery drain to a minimum switch off the defrost er as soon as the rear window is clear The defroster is automatically deactivated af ter approximately 6 to 17 minutes of oper ation depending on the outside temperature Activating gt Press button EJ The indicator lamp on the button lights up Deactivating gt Press button EJ again The indicator lamp on the button goes out Warning A Any accumulation of snow and ice should be removed from the rear window before driv ing Visibility could otherwise be impaired endangering you and others If the rear window defroster switches off too soon and the indicator lamp starts blinking this means that too many electrical consumers are operat ing simultaneously and there is insuffi cient voltage in the battery The system responds automatically by deactivating the rear window defroster As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage the rear window defroster au tomatically turns itself back
198. in starter switch to position 1 or 2 Head restraint tilt The head restraints will fold backward Tuo disrenthesdrosraht ande post gt Press the symbol side on the rocker i tions are available Li switch 1 to release the head restraints You can also fold the head restraints back using the switch in the center console gt page 36 The head restraints will fold backward Getting started Adjusting Head restraint height rear outer seats Steering wheel Warning A Do not adjust the steering wheel while driv ing Adjusting the steering wheel while driv a ing or driving without the adjustment locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle ABA esd When leaving the vehicle always remove the Raising key from the starter switch and lock your ve 1 Release lever hicle 2 Steering column lengthen or shorten gt Pull up on head restraint The electrical steering wheel adjustment 3 Steering column height Lowering feature can also be operated with the driv gt To unlock the steering column pull gt Push button 1 er s door open Do not leave children unat lever 1 out until its stop limit gt Push down on head restraint tended in the vehicle or with access to an gt Adjust the steering wheel to the de unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of a sired position nE vehicle equipment may cause an accident Warning Z i and or serious personal injury gt To lock press lever
199. in the speed ometer Operating the control system Selecting the submenu or setting the volume E down to decrease up to increase Telephone to take a call to end a call Menu systems for next menu for previous menu Moving within a menu for next display for previous display Pressing any of the buttons on the multi function steering wheel will alter what is shown in the multifunction display The information available in the multifunc tion display is arranged in menus each containing a number of functions or sub menus The individual functions are then found within the relevant menu radio or CD op erations under AUDIO for example These functions serve to call up relevant informa tion or to customize the settings for your vehicle It is helpful to think of the menus and the functions within each menu as being arranged in a circular pattern e If you press button or repeatedly you will pass through each menu one after the other e Ifyou press button RA or EN repeatedly you will pass through each function display one after the other in the current menu In the SETTINGS menu instead of functions you will find a number of submenus for calling up and changing settings For instructions on using these submenus see the Settings menu section gt page 120 The number of menus available in the sys tem depends on which optional equipment is installed in your vehicle Controls in
200. indow Clean with soft bristle brush or use a dry shampoo cleaner in case of excessive dirt Seat belts The webbing must not be treated with chemical cleaning agents Use only clear lukewarm water and soap Do not dry the webbing at temperatures above 176 F 80 C or in direct sunlight AN Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection Warning Leather upholstery MB Tex upholstery Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing Pour Mercedes Benz approved Interior clothing that have the tendency to give off Care onto soft lint free cloth and apply coloring e g when wet etc may cause with light pressure the upholstery to become permanently dis colored By lining the seats with a proper intermediate cover contact discoloration will be prevented Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes Benz approved Leather Care Exercise particular care when cleaning per forated leather as its underside should not become wet Operation Vehicle care Practical hints What to do if Where will find Unlocking locking in an emergency Opening closing in an emergency Replacing bulbs Replacing wiper blades Flat tire Battery Jump starting Towing the vehicle Fuses Practical hints What to do if What to do if Lamps in instrument cluster Problem
201. ine an engaged first or reverse gear alone may not prevent your vehicle from moving possibly hitting people or objects Always set the parking brake in addition to engaging first or reverse gear gt page 51 When parked on an incline turn front wheels towards the road curb Warning A When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could move the gearshift lever which could result in an accident and or serious injury Warning A On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action Controls in detail Manual transmission This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control Your vehicle s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control Downshifting gears leading to overrev ving the engine can result in engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Never hold the vehicle stopped on a hill by using the clutch pedal The clutch may be damaged which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warran ty Do not exceed the engine speed limits gt page 109 Shifting into reverse gt Stop the vehicle completely gt Pull gearshift lever up and shift in R reverse Controls in detail Automatic transmission Automatic transmission Information for driving with an
202. ine get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until it cools down Possible cause The coolant is too hot During severe operating conditions and stop and go city traffic the coolant tem perature may rise close to 248 F 120 C Practical hints What to do if Suggested solution gt gt Stop the vehicle and turn off the engine Only start the engine again after the message disappears You could other wise damage the engine The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248 F 120 C Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Practical hints What to do if Display Possible cause COOLANT The poly V belt could be broken STOP ENGINE OFF COOLANT The cooling fan for the coolant is VISIT WORKSHOP malfunctioning Suggested solution gt Stop immediately and check the poly V belt If it is broken gt Do not continue to drive Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine Notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center If it is intact gt Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this message displayed Doing so could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Observe the coolant temperature display Have the fan replaced as soon as possible Disp
203. ine if you see or hear steam coming from it Turn off the engine get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until it cools down Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 gt Call up the trip odometer and main odometer by pressing button or on the multifunction steering wheel gt page 112 Press button Jj or R until the coolant temperature display appears i Excessive coolant temperatures trigger a warning in the multifunction display During severe operating conditions and stop and go city traffic the coolant tem perature may rise close to 248 F 120 C The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248 F 120 C Doing so may cause serious en gine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Trip odometer gt Make sure you are viewing the trip odometer and main odometer gt page 111 in the multifunction display gt Press and hold the reset knob on the in strument cluster gt page 22 until the trip odometer is reset Tachometer The red marking on the tachometer de notes excessive engine speed Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds as it may result in serious en gine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty To help protect the engine the fuel supply is interrupted if the engine is operated within the red marking Controls in detail Instrument c
204. ing off apply as little throttle as possible e While driving ease up on the accelera tor e Adapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road conditions Failure to observe these guidelines could cause the vehicle to skid The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speed Safety and Security Driving safety systems A The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded The ESP cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns fol lowing another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabili ties of a ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Warning Because of the ESP s automatic opera tion the engine must be shut off key in starter switch position O or 1 when e the parking brake is being tested on a brake test dynamometer e the vehicle is being towed with the front axle raised Active braking action through the ESP may otherwise seriously damage the rear axle brake system The ESP will only function properly if you use wheels of the recommended tire size More information can be found in the Practical hints section gt page 256 Switching off the ESP A Warning The ESP s
205. ion controls as well as the airflow volume control are set to RIJ and there is a high need for cooling the display AUTO MAXCOOL ap pears This provides the fastest possible cooling of the vehicle interior when windows and sliding pop up roof are closed Defrosting i These settings should only be selected for a short time Activating gt Press button Kg The indicator lamp on the button lights up Switch off air recirculation if selected Press button REJ The indicator lamp on the button goes out Close center air vents Adjust side air vents upwards Deactivating gt Press button Keegy The indicator lamp on the button goes out Defrosting is turned off Air recirculation mode a ______________ Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle from the outside This setting cuts off the intake of outside air and recirculates the air in the passenger compartment Warning A When the outside temperature is below 41 F 5 C only switch to air recirculation mode for short periods to prevent window fogging Activating gt Press button Ray The indicator lamp on the button lights up i If you keep button pressed the side windows and the sliding pop up roof will be closed The air recirculation mode is activated automatically e at high outside temperatures e ifthe concentration of carbon mon oxide and nitroge
206. ious menus Detailed instructions on making individual settings can be found on the following pages INSTRUMENT CLUSTER LIGHTING VEHICLE Set time hours Set daytime running lamp mode Set station selection mode USA only radio Set time minutes Set locator lighting Set automatic locking Select time display mode Exterior lamps delayed shut off Select temperature display Interior lighting delayed shut off mode Select speedometer display mode Select language Select display speed display or outside temperature Control system CONVENIENCE Activate easy entry exit feature Set key dependency Set parking position for exterior rear view mirror Controls in detail Control system Instrument cluster submenu Set time hours Set time minutes Access the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu Move the selection marker with gt Move the selection marker with via the SETTINGS menu Use the the or E button to the the or FES button to the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu to change INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu pata scene maplay Pr gt Press button EAN or RA repeatedly Press button 4 or eg repeatedly ile So a are ca until you see this message in the until you see this message in the Funeuan Page display TIME SETTINGS HOURS display TIME SETTINGS MINUTES Set time hours see The selection marker is on the hour The selection marker is on the minute below setting setting Set time minutes see f
207. is regis tered you must have the headlamps modified for symmetrical low beams Relevant information can be obtained at your authorized Mercedes Benz Cen ter Daytime running lamp mode gt Turn exterior lamp switch to position EJ or EG When the engine is running the low beam headlamps are automatically switched on In low ambient light conditions the parking lamps will also switch on Canada only When you shift from a driving position to position N or P the low beam switches off with a three minute delay For nighttime driving you should turn the exterior lamp switch to position to permit activation of the high beam head lamps USA only The high beam headlamps can also be ac tivated when driving with the daytime run ning lamp mode activated and exterior lamp switch in position I To activate the daytime running lamp mode see Setting daytime running lamp mode USA only gt page 125 e See notes on the exterior lamp switch gt page 101 Locator lighting and night security illu mination Locator lighting and night security illumi nation are described in the control system section under Setting locator lighting gt page 126 and Setting night security il lumination gt page 126 Switching on front fog lamps gt Make sure that the low beam head lamps are switched on gt Pull out exterior lamp switch to first stop The green indicator lamp in the lamp switc
208. isplay i With the daytime running lamp mode activated and the engine running the low beam headlamps cannot be switched off manually Controls in detail Lighting Manual headlamp mode The low beam headlamps and parking lamps can be switched on and off with the exterior lamp switch For exterior lamp switch see above Automatic headlamp mode The parking lamps low beam headlamps and license plate lamps switch on and off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to BUA Warning A In automatic headlamp mode the head lamps will not be automatically switched on under foggy conditions To minimize risk to you and to others activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp switch to zp The driver is responsible for the operation of the vehicle s lights at all times The automat ic headlamp feature is only an aid to the driver Switch on the vehicle lights manually when driving or when traffic conditions require you to do so e With the daytime running lamp mode activated the low beam headlamps will not be switched off automatically i Front fog lamps and rear fog lamp can not be switched on manually with exte rior lamp switch in position RJ To activate the fog lamps turn exterior lamp switch to position EE i If you drive in countries where vehicles drive on the other side of the road than the country where the vehicle
209. it Turn off the engine get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until it cools down At the gas station Warning A Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous It burns violently and can cause serious inju ry Whenever you are around gasoline avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact extinguish all smoking materials Never allow sparks flame or smoking materials near gasoline Warning A Flexible Fuel Vehicles MY 2003 Mercedes Benz C 320 models except those equipped with manual transmission or 4MATIC only Ethanol fuel E85 and its vapors are highly flammable poisonous and burn easily Etha nol fuel can cause serious injuries if ignited or if you come into contact with it or inhale fumes of it Avoid inhalation of Ethanol fumes and skin contact with Ethanol Extin guish all open flames before fueling Never smoke or create sparks close to Ethanol The fuel filler flap is located on the right hand side of the vehicle towards the rear Locking unlocking the vehicle with the remote control automatically locks unlocks the fuel filler flap gt Remove the key from the starter switch gt Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at the point indicated by the arrow The fuel filler flap springs open gt Turn the fuel cap to the left and hold on to it until possible pressure is released Operation At the gas station Take off the cap and set it in the recess on the fuel filler flap
210. ither left or right turn only the re spective left or right turn signals will operate when the key in the starter switch is in position 1 or 2 Switching off the hazard warning flasher gt Press hazard warning flasher switch again Controls in detail Lighting Interior lighting i Deactivating automatic control If the door remains open the interior gt Press the rocker switch to the right The controls are located in the overhead lamps switch off automatically after ap iti i control panel p y p position 3 proximately five minutes when the key is removedor inthe starter switch The interior lighting remains switched off even when position 0 An interior lamp switched on manually Cepia UNORE NENERICIE does not go out automatically e opening a door O amp e removing the SmartKey from the Activating automatic control starter switch gt Press the rocker switch to the center Manual control position 4 P82 20 2423 31 1 Rear interior lights Interior lamps are switched on in dark Switching rear interior lights on and off 2 Right front reading lamp ness when Se ira PA 3 Rocker switch Automatic control off e unlocking the vehicle 4 Rocker switch Automatic control on P The lights in the rear passenger com e 5 Rocker switch Front interior lights on opening a coar partment go on 6 Left front reading lamp e the SmartKey from start Press button 1 again er switc The lights in the rear pass
211. ities Therefore use only brands tested and recommended by Mercedes Benz Vehicle components and their respective lubricants must match Engine with oil filter Automatic transmission Manual transmission Rear axle 1 MB part no 001 989 21 03 10 2 MB part no 001 989 26 03 10 Model C 230 Kompressor Sport C 240 C 320 C 320 Sport C 240 4MATIC C 320 4MATIC C 320 4MATIC Sport C 32 AMG C 230 Kompressor Sport C 240 all models C 320 all models C 32 AMG Capacity 5 8 US qt 5 5 7 9 US qt 7 5 1 7 9 US qt 7 5 1 7 9 US qt 7 5 1 7 4 US qt 7 01 7 4 US qt 7 01 7 4 US qt 7 01 8 5 US qt 8 0 8 5 US qt 8 0 1 1 3 US qt 1 21 1 2 US qt 1 11 1 2 US qt 1 11 1 2 US qt 1 11 1 5 US qt 1 41 Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Please refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet or inquire at your Mercedes Benz Center Fuels coolants lubricants etc Recommended engine oils MB Automatic Transmission Oil MB Manual Transmission Oil Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90 Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Front axle Transfer case Power steering Front wheel hubs Brake system Cooling system Fuel tank including a reserve of 1 MB part no 001 989 21 03 10 Model C 240 4MATIC C 320 4MATIC C 320 4MATIC Sport C 240 4MATIC C 320 4MATIC C 320 4MATIC Sport C 230 Kompressor Sport C 240 all models C 320 all mo
212. ition 2 The emergency release button does The trunk remains locked even when the not open the trunk lid if the vehicle The lock is located next to the recessed vehicle is centrally unlocked battery is discharged or disconnected handle o You can only cancel the separate trunk locking mode by means of the mechan ical key i If the emergency release button is pressed and the vehicle was centrally locked the exterior lamps will flash and the alarm will sound as the trunk lid opens To cancel the alarm insert the key in the starter switch or press button or on the key 1 Unlocked 2 Locked Separately unlocking the trunk gt Pull the mechanical key out of the SmartKey gt page 285 gt Insert the mechanical key in the trunk lid lock gt Turn the key completely to the left to position 1 see above You can now open the trunk gt page 88 i Unlocking the trunk with the mechani cal key will trigger the anti theft alarm system To cancel the alarm do one of the following e Press button or on the SmartKey e Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch Automatic central locking The doors and the trunk automatically lock when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of ap proximately 9 mph 15 km h or more You can open a locked door from the in side Open door only when conditions are safe to do so Controls in detail Locking and unlocking
213. ivate and deactivate the easy entry exit feature When the feature is activated the steering wheel and driver s seat will move back to facilitate exiting when you e remove the key from the starter switch e open the driver s door However the engine must be turned off Controls in detail Control system A You must make sure that no one can be come trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel and the driver s seat when the easy entry exit feature is activated and the driver s door is being opened and the engine is turned off or the SmartKey is removed from the starter switch Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsu pervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Warning Do not leave children unattended in the ve hicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could open the driver s door and unintentionally activate the easy entry exit feature which could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Controls in detail Control system After entering the vehicle the steering gt Move the selection marker with The following settings are available for wheel and seat will move into the position the or EES button to the the easy entry exit feature stored in memory when CONVENTENCE submenu OFF The easy en e the driver s door is closed gt Press button or RA repeatedly try exit feature
214. j below Select time display mode 123 HOURS 30 f MINUTES 12 60 f Select temperature display 123 i mode P54 30 6584 31 P54 30 6585 31 Select speedometer display 123 gt Press or E to set the hour gt Press or E to set the minutes mode Select language 124 Select display speed display or 124 outside temperature Selecting time display mode Selecting temperature display mode Controls in detail Control system Selecting speedometer display mode gt Move the selection marker with gt Move the selection marker with gt Move the selection marker with the or J button to the the or FES button to the the or EES button to the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu Press button or repeatedly Press button or repeatedly Press button or repeatedly until you see this message in the display 12 24 HOUR The selection marker is on the current setting until you see this message in the display TEMP INDICATOR The selection marker is on the current setting until you see this message in the display DISPLAY VALUES IN The selection marker is on the current setting 1 gt Press or E to set temperature unit to degrees Celsius C or degrees Fahrenheit F P54 30 6588 31 gt Press or E to set speedometer unit to km or miles gt Press or ME to set the 12h or 24h time display mode Controls in detail Control system Selecting langu
215. just the air distribution on each side of the passenger compartment The following symbols are found on the controls Symbol Function lt gt Directs air through the center side and rear passenger compartment air vents Directs air to the windows Directs air into the entire vehicle interior Directs air to the footwells Adjusting manually gt Press left or right H button The indicator lamp on the button goes out The air distribution can be adjusted manually Adjusting automatically gt Press left or right H button The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air distribution is adjusted automatically Windshield fogged on the outside gt Switch the windshield wipers on gt Switch to manual mode gt Turn the air distribution control to FEE or RE Controls in detail Automatic climate control Adjusting air volume Adjusting manually Seven blower speeds are available gt Press left WH or right side of air volume control switch until the re quested blower speed is attained The display Auto disappears and the automatic mode is switched off The selected blower speed is shown in the display Adjusting automatically gt Press left or right BZ button The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air volume is adjusted automatically Controls in detail Automatic climate control Maximum cooling MAXCOOL If the left and right air distribut
216. k of damaging the engine or the catalytic converter Suggested solution gt Continue driving with added caution p gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident gt Continue driving with added caution gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident gt Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as soon as possible gt Turn off the engine gt Add engine oil gt Check the engine oil level gt page 236 and add oil as required gt Have oil siphoned Observe all legal requirements with respect to its disposal Display ENGINE OIL VISIT WORKSHOP ENGINE OIL LEVEL VISIT WORKSHOP When the ENGINE OIL LEVEL CHECK LEVEL message appears while the engine is running and at operating temperature the engine oil level has dropped to approx imately the minimum mark on the dipstick When this occurs the warning will first come on intermittently and then stay on if the oil level drops further If no oil leaks are noted continue to drive to the nearest service station where the engine oil should be topped to the full mark on the dipstick with an approved oil Practical hints What to do if Possible cause Suggested solution The engine oil has dropped to a critical Check the engine oil level level gt page 236
217. ke and have the same tread design A Winter tires with a tread depth under 0 16 in 4 mm must be replaced They are no long er suitable for winter operation Warning Operation Winter driving Always observe the speed rating of the winter tires installed on your vehicle If the maximum speed for which your tires are rated is below the speed rating of your ve hicle you must place a notice to this effect where it will be seen by the driver Such no tices are available from your tire dealer or from any authorized Mercedes Benz Cen ter A If you use your spare tire when winter tires are fitted on the other wheels be aware that the difference in tire characteristics may very well impair turning stability and that overall driving stability may be reduced Adapt your driving style accordingly Warning Have the spare tire replaced with a winter tire at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Operation Winter driving Block heater Canada only The engine is equipped with a block heater The electrical cable may be installed at your authorized Mercedes Benz Center Snow chains Snow chains should only be driven on snow covered roads at speeds not to ex ceed 30 mph 50 km h Remove chains as soon as possible when driving on roads without snow i When driving with snow chains you may wish to deactivate the ESP gt page 75 before setting the vehicle in motion This will
218. kin unattended in ne vehicle or wnt access to E e while in the selective remote con an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of gt Press upper half 1 of the central lock trol mode only the door opened vehicle equipment may cause an accident ing switch from the inside is unlocked and or serious personal injury YE a If both front doors are closed the vehi e while in the global remote control cle locks mode the complete vehicle is un locked when a door is opened from the inside Seats Information on seat adjustment can be found in the Getting started section gt page 32 Easy entry exit feature With the easy entry exit feature activated the steering wheel tilts upwards and the driver s seat moves to the rear This allows easier entry into and exit from the vehicle when the driver s door is opened However the engine must be turned off When the SmartKey is inserted in the start er switch and the driver s door is closed the steering wheel and the driver s seat re turn to their last set positions Warning A You must make sure that no one can be come trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel and the driver s seat when the easy entry exit feature is activated the driver s door is being opened and the en gine is turned off or the SmartKey is re moved from the starter switch Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsuper vise
219. king brake USA only lights up while driving and you parking brake set gt page 51 hear a warning sound The red brake warning lamp There is insufficient brake fluid Risk of accident Carefully stop the lights up while driving in the reservoir vehicle and notify an authorized Warning A Driving with the brake warning lamp illumi nated can result in an accident Have your brake system checked immediately if the brake warning lamp stays on Don t add brake fluid before checking the brake system Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot en gine parts and the brake fluid catching fire You can be seriously burned Mercedes Benz Center Do not add brake fluid This will not solve the problem If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks Problem Bese The yellow CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving The red seat belt warning lamp blinks for a brief period after starting the engine The yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp lights while driving Practical hints What to do if Possible cause Suggested solution There is a malfunction in gt Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center e The ignition system An on board diagnostic connector is used by the service station
220. l gt page 157 e button in the control panel of the automatic climate control gt page 157 To avoid damaging the seals do not transport any objects with sharp edges which can stick out of the slid ing pop up roof Open the sliding pop up roof only if the roof is clear of snow or ice The sliding pop up roof can be opened or closed manually should an electrical malfunction occur gt page 289 Controls in detail Sliding pop up roof Opening and closing the sliding pop up roof with the SmartKey The power windows will also be opened or closed when the sliding pop up roof is op erated with the key gt page 188 Warning A Never operate the windows or slid ing pop up roof if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure In case the procedure causes potential danger the procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the remote control button To reverse direction of movement press button for opening or for closing gt Aim transmitter eye at the front door handle Controls in detail Sliding pop up roof Closing Convenience feature Press and hold button after lock Opening Summer opening feature gt Press and hold button afterun gt Synchronizing the sliding pop up roof The power sliding pop up roof must be re locking the vehicle The windows and sliding pop up roof begin to open after approximately one
221. l indicator lamp 47 Selector lever position 140 8 Ko Antilock Brake Sys 73 left 141 tem ABS malfunc 257 Speedometer Program mode 142 tion indicator lamp Turn signal indicator lamp 47 Outside temperature dis 110 Brake warning 45 lamp USA only Sil right play one Fuel gauge with Digital clock 111 y s OJ Brake warning 45 Fuel reserve warning lamp 259 7 RRS Engine malfunction 259 lamp Canada only 51 Seat belt nonusage 61 inelicenor Lelie 258 warning lamp 259 Electronic Stability 15 Tadon 109 EH Supplemental 56 see n 5 10 Reset knob for restraint system 257 warning lamp cin indicator lamp E High beam head 47 My cae trip odome 109 indi er Multifunction display 111 lamp indicator 104 ae A with Indicator lamp with 9 he individual 120 eral settings Trip odometer 109 Ou ne ein ae A 7 F e Instrument cluster illu Main odometer 111 DTR Indicator lamp with Ee out function 1 The indicator lamp illuminates briefly when you turn the key in the starter switch to position 2 At a glance Multifunction steering wheel Multifunction steering wheel Item Page Multifunction display in 111 speedometer Operating control sys 111 tem Selecting the submenu or setting the volume E down to decrease up to increase Telephone Press button to take a call to end a call Item Page Menu systems Press but ton for next system ma for previous system Moving within a menu Press button f
222. l wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift dolly equipment This method is preferable to other types of towing Use flatbed or wheel lift dolly equip ment with key in starter switch turned to position 0 Do not tow with sling type equipment Towing with sling type equipment over bumpy roads will damage radiator and supports To prevent damage during transport do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or suspension parts Switch off the tow away alarm gt page 80 and deactivate the auto matic central locking gt page 129 When circumstances do not permit the recommended towing methods the vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the ground or front wheels raised except vehicles with 4MATIC only so far as necessary to have the vehicle moved to a safe location where the recommended towing methods can be employed Vehicles with automatic transmission and or 4MATIC Do not tow start the vehicle Vehicles with 4MATIC Do not tow with one axle raised Doing so could damage the transfer case which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty All wheels must be on or off the ground Observe instructions for towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised not permissible for vehicles with 4MATIC the engine must be shut off key in starter switch position O or 1 Otherwise the ESP will immediately be engaged and will apply t
223. lare 144 Installing Aid rror 214 69 10 65 Infant and child restraint systems Towing eye bolt Wiper blades 311 296 68 Instrument cluster Cleaning 252 Coolant temperature display Illumination 107 Lampsin 256 259 Multifunction display 111 Outside temperature indicator Selecting language 124 Instrument lighting 107 108 Instruments and controls see Cockpit 20 Integrated remote control Canadian programming 219 Erasing memory 220 Hand held transmitter Operating 220 Rolling code programming 219 Interior lighting 105 Activating automatic control Deactivating automatic control Delayed shut off 127 Manual operation 105 Interior storage spaces 203 Armrest 206 Cup holder 204 205 Glove box 203 22 107 342 108 110 218 105 105 Parcel net in front passenger footwell 206 Storage compartment in front of armrest 205 J Jack 279 Jump starting 306 K Key dependency memory Settings 131 Key positions in starter switch 31 Key mechanical 285 Key SmartKey Battery check lamp 85 Changing the batteries 287 Checking the batteries 86 Factory setting 85 Global locking 85 Global unlocking 85 Loss of 87 Positions in starter switch 31 Remote control 84 Restoring to factory setting 85 Selective setting 85 Starting the engine 44 Turning off the engine 53 Unlocking the trunk lid 86 Unlocking with 30 Keys 84 Kickdown 143 343 Kilometers miles in speedometer 123 Km h or mph in speedometer
224. lay ESP ESI NOT AVAILABLE Possible cause The ESP is deactivated because of a malfunction or interrupted power supply The ABS might not be operational The self diagnosis has not been completed The charging voltage has fallen below ten volts and the ESP has switched off Practical hints What to do if Suggested solution gt With vehicle stationary and the engine running turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right to synchronize the ESP If the ESP message does not go out gt Continue driving with added caution p gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident The display will clear itself after driving a short distance at more than 12 mph 20 km h gt When the voltage is above this value again the ESP is operational again gt f necessary have the generator and battery checked Practical hints What to do if Display ESP ESP VISIT WORKSHOP DISPLAY DEFECTIVE VISIT WORKSHOP ENGINE OIL LEVEL STOP ENGINE OFF ENGINE OIL LEVEL CHECK LEVEL ENGINE OIL LEVEL REDUCE OIL LEVEL Possible cause The ESP is deactivated because of a malfunction The ESP or the ESP display is malfunctioning There is no oil in the engine There is a danger of engine damage The engine oil level is too low You have added too much engine oil There is a ris
225. le Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could release the parking brake and or move the gear selector lever from position P either of which could result in an accident and or serious injury Warning A Getting out of your vehicle with the selector lever not fully engaged in position P is dan gerous Also when parked on an incline position P alone may not prevent your vehi cle from moving possibly hitting people or objects Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P manual transmission first or reverse gear When parked on an incline turn front wheel towards the road curb Switching off headlamps gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to EE gt page 47 More information can be found in the Controls in detail section gt page 101 Turning off engine gt Place the gear selector lever in position P manual transmission first or reverse gear i Always set the parking brake in addi tion to shifting to position P manual transmission first or reverse gear On steep slopes turn the front wheels towards the road curb Turn the key in the starter switch to position O and remove it The immobilizer is activated e Vehicles with automatic transmission The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P Press the seat belt release button gt pag
226. le child restraint seat is in stalled on the front passenger seat The system will automatically deactivate the passenger front airbag when sucha seat is properly installed indicator lamp located in the center con sole lights up See your authorized Mercedes Benz Center for availability airbag deactivation BabySmart compatible child seats Special restraint system for children The sensor system for the passenger seat prevents deployment of the pas senger side airbag if a BabySmart compatible child seat is installed BAS Brake Assist System System for potentially reducing braking distances in emergency braking situa tions The system is activated when it senses an emergency based on how fast the brake is applied Bi Xenon headlamps Headlamps which use an electric arc as the light source and produce a more intense light than filament headlamps Bi Xenon headlamps produce low beam and high beam Technical terms CAC Customer Assistance Center Mercedes Benz customer service cen ter which can help you with any ques tions about your vehicle and provide assistance in the event of a break down CAN system Controller Area Network Data bus network serving to control vehicle functions such as door locking or windshield wiping Cockpit All instruments switches buttons and indicator warning lamps in the passen ger compartment needed for vehicle operation and monitoring Technical ter
227. luster C 32 AMG On the C 32 AMG there is no red marking denoting excessive engine speed To help protect the engine the fuel supply is interrupted if the engine is operated at an excessive speed Controls in detail Instrument cluster Outside temperature indicator A The outside temperature indicator is not de signed to serve as an ice warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose Warning Indicated temperatures just above the freez ing point do not guarantee that the road sur face is free of ice The road may still be icy especially in wooded areas or on bridges The temperature sensor is located in the front bumper area Due to its location the sensor can be affected by road or engine heat during idling or slow driving This means that the accuracy of the displayed temperature can only be verified by com parison to a thermometer placed next to the sensor not by comparison to external displays e g bank signs etc When moving the vehicle into colder ambi ent temperatures e g when leaving your garage you will notice a delay before the lower temperature is displayed A delay also occurs when ambient temper atures rise This prevents inaccurate tem perature indications caused by heat radiated from the engine during idling or slow driving Control system The control system is activated as soon as the key in the starter switch is turned to position 1 The control syst
228. lways lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the vehicle The vehicle jack is stored in the space underneath the trunk floor together with the vehicle tool kit in the storage tray gt page 281 Vehicles with Minispare wheel The vehicle jack is stored in the space underneath the trunk floor together with the vehicle tool kit in the vehicle tool kit storage well casing gt page 279 P40 10 2773 31 Storage position gt Remove the vehicle jack from its compartment bb gt Push the crank handle up 25 f 2 P40 10 2774 31 Operational position gt Turnthe crank handle clockwise until it engages operational position Before storing the vehicle jack in its compartment e The vehicle jack should be fully collapsed e The handle must be folded in storage position Spare wheel Your vehicle is equipped with either a spare wheel with full size tire or a Minispare wheel Full size spare tire has marking 205 55 R16 or 225 45 R17 on sidewall Minispare has marking T 125 90 R16 on sidewall Identify the spare tire in your vehicle and follow appropriate instructions Vehicles with full size tire spare wheel The spare wheel is located in the compartment underneath the trunk floor gt Lift trunk floor cover and engage trunk floor handle in upper edge of trunk Practical hints Where will I find 1 Tool kit 2 Spare wheel 3 Storag
229. ly spray the vehicle with a dif fused jet of water Direct only a very weak spray towards the ventilation intake Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge and chamois frequently Rinse with clear water and thoroughly dry with a chamois Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the finish Due to the width of the vehicle fold in out side mirrors prior to running the vehicle through an automatic car wash to prevent damage to the mirrors In the winter thoroughly remove all traces of road salt as soon as possible When washing the underbody do not for get to clean the inner sides of the wheels Ornamental moldings For regular cleaning and care of very dirty chrome plated parts use a chrome cleaner Headlamps tail lamps turn signal lenses Use a mild car wash detergent such as Mercedes Benz approved Car Shampoo with plenty of water To prevent scratches never apply strong force and use only a soft non scratchy cloth when cleaning the lenses Do not at tempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth or sponge Wiper blades Clean the wiper blade inserts with a clean cloth and detergent solution Operation Vehicle care i For safety reasons switch off wipers and remove key from starter switch be fore cleaning the wiper blades other wise the wiper motor can suddenly turn on and cause injury Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto the windshield before turning the key in the starter switch
230. mp bulbs 291 295 Rear turn signal bulbs 295 Side marker lamp bulbs 294 Standing lamp bulbs 293 294 Wiper blade insert 296 Wiper blades 296 Reporting Safety defects 18 Reset knob in the instrument cluster Resetting All functions control system 120 All functions of a submenu 120 Fuel consumption 132 133 Service indicator FSS 248 Trip odometer 109 Residual heat utilization 163 Residual ventilation 163 23 120 Restraint system see Infant and child restraint systems 65 68 344 Reverse manual transmission Shifting into 137 Rims 322 Roadside Assistance 12 Rolling code programming 219 RON Research Octane Number Roof rack 196 Rotating wheels 244 Rubber parts Cleaning 252 234 344 S Safety Occupant 56 Safety belts see Seat belts 41 Safety defects Reporting 18 Safety systems Driving 73 Saving current speed 194 Searching Radio station 117 Seat belt force limiter 64 Seat belt height adjustment 43 Seat belts 61 Cleaning 252 Fastening 41 Height adjustment 43 Proper use of 43 63 Safety guidelines 59 Warning lamp 259 Seat cushion depth Adjusting 96 Seat heater Switching off 97 Switchingon 97 Seats 93 Adjusting 32 33 Easy entry exit feature 93 Heater 97 Manual seat 33 Multicontour seat 96 Power seat 34 Rapid seat heating 97 Split rear bench seat 199 Selecting Display 124 Selector lever 23 Lock 44 Position automatic transmission 23 138 Self test BabySmart airbag deactiva
231. mperature indicator 110 BAS etea RS 74 from TNE INSIDE siccccsscssesossesvecsseneosee 92 Control system ccccsccesseesseeseeeees 111 EOP eene e E EN 79 Sealen TEE Ee S 93 Multifunction display 00 111 Four wheel electronic traction Easy entry exit feature 93 Multifunction steering wheel 112 system 4MATIC with the ESP 78 Head restraints eeeeeeceeseeeeeeeees 94 MENUS ccscsaisvccsccsslevesdederdongesaesezbexes 114 Anti theft SySteMS eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 79 Multicontour seat eseese 96 Standard display menu 116 IMMODIIZEL eee eee eeeeeeeeeteeeeeees 79 Heated SCATS is viensececesuscreosseecseoens 97 AUDIO MENU cceesecesseeeeereeeeee 116 Anti theft alarm system e 79 Memory function oe eeeeeeeeneeeeeee 98 NAVI MENU cesseeeseceeteeeeeeeeeee 118 Tow away alarm ooo eeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeee 80 Storing positions into memory 99 Malfunction memory menu 118 Recalling positions from memory 99 Settings MENU ee ceeeeeeseeeeeeee 119 Storing exterior rear view mirror Trip computer mMenu eee 132 Parking POSITION eee eeeeeeeeeee eee 100 TEL MENU ccccccceessceceeessseeeeees 134 Manual transmission eeeeeeees 137 Shifting into reverse 137 Automatic transmission 0 138 Automatic climate control 0 0 0 0 156 Power WINOWS ee eee eeeeeteeeeee 187 One touch gearshif
232. ms COMAND Cockpit Management and Data System Information and operating center for vehicle sound and communications systems including the radio and navi gation system as well as for other optional equipment CD changer telephone etc Control system The control system is used to call up vehicle information and to change component settings Information and messages appear in the multifunction display The driver uses the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel to navigate through the system and to ad just settings Cruise control Driving convenience system for auto matically maintaining the vehicle speed set by the driver Engine number The number set by the manufacturer and placed on the cylinder block to uniquely identify each engine pro duced Engine oil viscosity Measurement for the inner friction vis cosity of the oil at different tempera tures The higher the temperature an oil can tolerate without becoming thin or the lower the temperature it can tol erate without becoming viscous the better the viscosity ESP Electronic Stability Program Improves vehicle handling and direc tional stability ETD Emergency Tensioning Device Device which deploys in certain frontal and rear collisions exceeding the sys tem s threshold to tighten the seat belts gt SRS FSS Flexible Service System Service indicator in the multifunction display that informs the driver when
233. n no longer able to hear you Muting gt Press the MUT key Unmuting gt Press the MUT key again Terminating a call gt Press the END key gt The current call is disconnected Call waiting If you receive another call during an al ready active call you can accept the sec ond call and switch between the two Accepting a second call gt Press the SND key You are connected with the second caller the first call is muted Switching between the calls gt Press the SND key again Terminating the second call gt Press the END key The current call will be terminated You are connected with the muted call again Power windows Opening and closing the windows The side windows can be opened and closed electrically The switches for all the side windows are on the driver s door The switches for the respective windows are on the front passenger and the rear doors P54 25 2951 31 1 Left front window 2 Right front window 3 Switch for rear door window override gt page 71 4 Right rear window 5 Left rear window Warning A When closing the windows make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure The closing of the door windows can be im mediately halted by releasing the switch or if switch was pulled past the resistance point and released by either pressing or pulling the respective switch If the window encounters an obstruction that block
234. n oxide in the out side air increases for example in a tunnel Please note that the charcoal filter must be activated see below for the air recirculation mode to be activated automatically If you have turned off the air condition ing gt page 163 or the outside temperature is below 41 F 5 C the air recirculation mode will not switch on automatically Deactivating gt Press button RJ The indicator lamp on the button goes out i If you keep button pressed the side windows and the sliding pop up roof will be returned to their previous position The air recirculation mode is deactivated automatically e after five minutes if the outside temper ature is below approximately 41 F 5 C e after five minutes if the air conditioning is turned off e after 30 minutes if the outside temper ature is above approximately 41 F 5 C Controls in detail Automatic climate control At outside temperatures above 79 F 26 C the system will not automatically switch back to outside air A quantity of outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes Charcoal filter An activated charcoal filter markedly re duces bad odors and removes pollutants from air entering the passenger compart ment Activating gt Press button Ey The indicator lamp on the button lights up The system switches automatically to the air recirculation mode if the carbon monoxide CO or nitrogen oxide NOx c
235. ng and improper fuel can cause engine damage Mercedes Benz Canada Inc European Delivery Department 849 Eglinton Avenue East Toronto Ontario M4G 2L5 Introduction Where to find it Where to find it This Operator s Manual is designed to pro vide comprehensive support information for you the vehicle operator For you to find information quickly each section has its own reference color MTN At a glance Here you will find an overview of all the controls that can be operated from the driver s seat EEEE Getting started Here you will find all the information you need for your first drive You should read this section first if this is your first Mercedes Benz vehicle or if you are rent ing or borrowing this vehicle ERE Safety and Security Here you will find descriptions of the safety features of your vehicle O Controls in detail Here you will find detailed information about the equipment installed in your vehi cle This section expands on the Getting started section and also describes techni cal innovations If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle this section will be of particular interest to you S Operation Here you will find all the information you need for the proper operation of your vehi cle _ _ Practical hints This section provides fast assistance for dealing with problems you may encounter I Technical
236. ng 234 243 Tire speed rating 227 345 Tire traction 227 Tires 242 322 339 Consumer information 339 Direction of rotation 243 Driving instructions 226 Retreads 242 Rims and tires 322 Service life 243 Temperature 244 Temperature grades 340 Tread depth 245 Wear pattern 244 Winter 245 Tools 279 Tow away alarm 25 80 Arming 80 Disarming 80 Disarming for transport 80 Towing eye bolt vehicle tool kit Installing 311 Towing the vehicle 308 Tracking services For stolen vehicle 217 Traction 142 339 345 Transmission see Automatic or manual transmission 238 Transmission selector lever 288 Unlocking manually 288 Tread depth tires 245 Tread Wear 339 Trip computer 132 Trip odometer Resetting 109 Trunk Auxiliary fuse box 313 Closing the lid 89 Lamp 106 Opening 86 88 Opening from inside vehicle 88 Separately locking 90 Separately unlocking 91 Trunk lid emergency release 89 Trunk lid Closing 89 Message in display 272 Turn signal lamps Replacing bulbs 290 291 Turn signals 47 Additional in mirrors 290 Cleaning lenses 251 Front bulbs 290 292 294 Indicator lamps 23 Rear bulbs 291 295 Turning off Engine 53 U Units Setting speedometer units 123 Setting temperature units 123 Unlocking 30 84 Centrally from inside 92 Driver s door in an emergency 285 Fuel filler flap 233 Global 85 Inanemergency 285 Selective settings 85 Separately the trunk 91 Transmission selector lever manually 288 Vehicl
237. ng pag es Otherwise the windows could fog up impairing visibility and endangering you and others Warning i If the vehicle interior is hot ventilate the interior before driving off Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield free of snow and debris Do not obstruct air flow by placing ob jects on the air flow through exhaust slots below the rear window Use temperature controls 1 and 14 for the left side or 6 and 7 for the right side to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small increments preferably starting at 72 F 22 C i When operating the climate control system in automatic mode you will ture air volume and air distribution only rarely need to adjust the tempera Increasing gt Push temperature control 1 and or 6 The automatic climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature Decreasing gt Push temperature control 7 and or 14 The automatic climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature Adding outside air gt Turn thumbwheel 3 in dashboard gt page 156 to increase airflow of out side air through air vents for center left and right sides and rear passenger compartment Adjusting air distribution Use air distribution controls 2 and 5 gt page 157 to separately ad
238. ng tire pres sure where the temperature is different from the outside temperature Tire temperature and tire pressure are also increased while driving depending on the driving speed and the tire load Check the spare tire periodically for condi tion and inflation Spare tires will age and become worn over time even if never used and thus should be inspected and replaced when necessary A Follow recommended inflation pressures Warning Do not overinflate tires Overinflated tires can result in sudden deflation blowout be cause they are more likely to become punc tured or damaged by road debris potholes etc Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires wear unevenly adversely affect handling and fuel economy and are more likely to fail from being overheated Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified vehicle capacity weight as indicat ed by the label on the pillar in the driver s door opening Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly causing a blowout Rotating wheels A Rotate front and rear wheels only if they are of the same size Warning On vehicles with the same wheel size all around wheels can be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles 5000 to 10000 km or sooner if necessary according to the de gree of tire wear The same direction of tire rotation must be retained Rotate the wheels before the characteris tic tire wear pattern becomes visible shoulder wear on f
239. ning The instrument cluster display is malfunctioning Certain electronic systems are unable to relay information to the control system The following systems may have failed e Coolant temperature display e Tachometer e Cruise control display The fluid level has dropped to about 5 of total reservoir capacity Suggested solution gt gt Start the engine gt page 44 Have the battery checked at a service station Continue driving with added caution Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Have the electronic systems checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center gt page 259 Add washer fluid gt page 241 Where will I find First aid kit The first aid kit is stored in the trunk on the left side secured by a velcro strap Ga P68 00 3017 31 gt Unfasten velcro strap gt Remove first aid kit i Check expiration dates and contents for completeness at least once a year and replace missing expired items Vehicle tool kit The following is included e Vehicle tool kit e Towing eye bolt e Wheel wrench e Alignment bolt e Vehicle jack e Wheel bolts e Special fuse extractor Spare fuses Practical hints Where will I find Removing the vehicle tool kit Vehicles with full size tire spare wheel The vehicle tool kit is stored in the space underneath the trunk floor in the storage tray gt page 281 Vehicles with Minispare
240. ntinue driving with added caution switched off The BAS and the ESP are also switched off see messages in display The brake system is still functioning normally gt but without the ABS available The charging voltage has fallen below 10 volts and the ABS has switched off There is a malfunction in the restraint sys tems The airbags or emergency tensioning device ETDs could deploy unexpectedly or fail to activate in an accident operational For your safety we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately to have the system checked otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an Wheels may lock during hard braking reducing steering capability Have the system checked at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions in creases the risk of an accident gt When the voltage is above this value again the ABS is operational again gt If necessary have the generator and battery checked gt Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center accident which could result in serious or fatal injury or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could result in an accident and or injury to you or to others Practical hints What to do if Problem Possible cause Suggested solution Canada only The red brake warning lamp You are driving with the gt Release the par
241. obilizer 79 Tow away alarm 80 341 Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning 227 Armrest Storage compartment in front of 205 Storage spaces 206 Ashtray 207 ATF automatic transmission fluid AUDIO menu 116 Selecting radio station Audio system 165 Audio and telephone operation Button and soft key operation 117 Cassette mode 174 CD mode 178 Operating and display elements Operating safety 165 Operation 168 Radio mode 171 238 165 168 166 168 168 Switching off Switching on Telephone operation 182 Automatic antiglare for rear view mirror 144 Automatic central locking Activating deactivating control system 129 Automatic climate control 156 Activating 157 Adjusting air distribution 159 Adjusting air volume 159 Air recirculation mode 160 Deactivating 157 Defrosting 160 Rear window defroster 153 162 Residual heat utilization 163 Residual ventilation 163 Setting the temperature 158 Automatic headlamp mode 102 Automatic lighting control Activating 105 Deactivating 105 Automatic locking when driving 91 Automatic transmission 138 Accelerator position 143 Emergency operation Limp Home Mode 143 Fluid level 238 Gear ranges 140 Gear selector lever position 141 Gear shifting malfunctions 143 Kickdown 143 Manual shifting 139 One touch gearshifting 139 Program mode selector switch 142 Selector lever position 138 Starting with 44 Transmission fluid 238 Winter program mode 142 Auxili
242. ode 171 Radio see Radio mode Radio transmitters control and operation 230 Range distance to empty Calling up 133 Rapid seat heating Switchingon 97 Reading lamp 27 Rear bench seat Foldable 199 Rear door window Blocking operation 71 Rear fog lamp 291 Bulb 291 Switchingon 103 Rear lamp bulbs Replacing 295 Rear lamps see Tail lamps Rear outer seats Adjusting head restraint height 37 Rear passenger compartment Adjustable air vents 155 164 Rear seat head restraints Adjusting 35 Adjusting tilt 36 Folding back 36 Folding back with switch 36 Installing 95 Outer seats 95 Placing upright 36 Removing 95 Rear view mirror automatic antiglare 144 Rear view mirrors see Mirrors Rear window defroster 153 162 Rear window sunshade 147 Reconnecting Vehicle battery 305 Refrigerant Air conditioning 332 Regular checks 234 Reinstalling vehicle battery 304 Remote control Integrated 218 SmartKey 84 Remote door unlock With Tele Aid 216 Remote Vehicle Diagnostics 344 Removing Minispare wheel 283 Spare wheel 281 Vehicle battery 304 Vehicle tool kit 279 Wheel 299 Wiper blade insert 296 Wiper blades 296 Replacing Backup lamp bulbs 295 Brake lamp bulbs 295 Bulbs 290 Front lamp bulbs 292 Front turn signal bulbs 292 293 Fuses 313 High beam bulbs 292 High beam bulbs xenon type headlamps 293 License plate lamp bulbs 295 Low beam bulbs 292 Parking lamp bulbs 293 294 Rear fog lamp bulb 295 Rear la
243. off the engine and leaving the vehicle always e Keep right foot on brake pedal e Firmly depress parking brake pedal e Move the selector lever to position P manual transmission first or reverse If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance or you suspect that possi ble damage to your vehicle has occurred you should turn on the hazard warning flash ers carefully slow down and drive with cau tion to an area which is a safe distance from the road Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody for possible damage If the vehicle or tires appear unsafe have it towed to the nearest Do not allow your tires to wear down too far As tread depth approaches Tig in 1 5 mm the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply reduced Depending upon the weather and or road surface conditions the tire traction varies widely Specified tire pressures must be main tained This applies particularly if the tires are subject to high loads e g high speeds heavy loads high ambient temperatures Mercedes Benz Center or tire dealer for re gean pairs e Slowly release brake pedal e When parked on an incline turn front Tread wear indicators TWI are required by wheels towards the road curb law These indicators are located in six e Turn the key to starter switch places on the tread circumference and be position 0 come visible at a tread depth of approxi e Take the key and lock vehicle when lea
244. omobiles Maintenance cccccccesesseeeeeeeteees Roadside Assistance seseeeee Change of address or ownership Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada c cceeeesees Where to find it cece eeeesseeeeeseseeeeees SVIMDOIS o rerea ET Operating safety s s s Proper use of the vehicle Problems with your vehicle 5 Reporting safety defects eee Reporting Safety Defects At a glance nocie 19 GOGK PIE serseri eiennenn annn 20 Instrument cluster sessseeseseesessereeeeee 22 Multifunction steering wheel 24 Center console ceeesecesseeeeseerenees 25 Upper part 2 0 ceeeeceeessssteeeesseteeeeees 25 Lower Parts ivscsstarescsesceccaedatercadcseeesan 26 Overhead control panel cccescee 27 Door control panel ccssecccceesseeeeees 28 Getting started ce eeeeeeees 29 UNIOCKING Ase 22c ct a 30 Unlocking with SmartKey 30 ACU USTIN Seca ies sevens e eiae E E 32 Seals siete TR 32 Steering wheel 37 MUNTONS sists csethereesteteries a a 39 Dri VINE e Peces ee Ee N 41 Fastening the seat belt 41 Starting the engine uu ee 44 Switching on headlampsS 47 Turn signals and high beam 47 Windshield WiperS cccccsesseees 48 Problems while driving 00 49 Parking and locking 51 Parking Drake eeeeeseeeeseeeee
245. on Always lock backrest in its upright position when rear seat bench is occupied cargo is being carried in the trunk or the extended cargo compartment is not in use Check for secure locking by pushing and pulling on the backrest In an accident during hard braking or sud den maneuvers loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle To help avoid personal injury during a colli sion or sudden maneuver exercise care when transporting cargo Controls in detail Loading i To prevent unauthorized persons from access to the trunk always lock back rest in its upright position Controls in detail Loading Loading instructions P00 01 2270 31 The total load weight including vehicle oc cupants and luggage cargo should not ex ceed the vehicle capacity weight indicated on the certification tag which can be found on the left door pillar The handling characteristics of a fully load ed vehicle depend greatly on the load dis tribution It is therefore recommended to load the vehicle according to the illustra tions shown with the heaviest items being placed towards the front of the vehicle Always place items being carried against front or rear seat backrests and fasten them as securely as possible The heaviest portion of the cargo should al ways be kept as low as possible since it in fluences
246. on Page 105 190 106 105 134 182 209 39 144 217 106 209 At a glance Overhead control panel At a glance Door control panel Door control panel Item Page Door handle 87 Memory function for stor 98 ing seat mirror and steer ing wheel settings Seat adjustment 32 34 93 Switches for opening clos 187 ing front door windows Switch for rear door win 71 dow override Switches for opening clos 187 ing rear door windows Remote trunk lid release 88 switch Getting started 29 Getting started Unlocking Unlocking The Getting started section provides an Unlocking with SmartKey gt Press unlock button on the key overview of the vehicle s most basic func tions First time Mercedes Benz owners should pay special attention to the infor mation given here All turn signal lamps blink once The locking knobs in the doors move up gt Get in the vehicle and insert the key in the starter switch i Canada only Only vehicles equipped with an anti theft alarm system have SmartKeys with integrated panic If you are already familiar with the basic functions described here the Controls in detail section will help you with further in formation The corresponding page refer ences are at the end of each segment P80 35 2086 31 SmartKey with remote control button 4 1 Lock button 2 Opening button for trunk More information can be fo
247. on K Redialing If you press and hold EAN or RA for The system dials the selected phone The control system stores the most longer than one second the system number recently dialed phone numbers This scrolls rapidly through the list of names until you release the button again eliminates the need to search through your e f connection is successful the i entire phone book name of the party you called and Cancel the quick search mode by the duration of the call will appear Press button or repeatedly pressing EN in the display until you see the TEL menu in the j D display gt Press button K 06 61 15 In the display you see the first number in the redial memory gt Press button or R repeatedly e f a Saeed is ele the e until the desired name appears in the control system stores the dialed display number in the redial memory gt Press button K The control system dials the selected phone number Manual transmission Information for driving with a manual transmission is found in the Getting start ed section gt page 44 Gearshift lever Do not exceed the maximum speed in the individual gears Refer to tachometer gt page 109 for engine speeds Warning AS For vehicles equipped with a manual trans mission getting out of your vehicle with the gearshift lever not engaged in first or re verse gear and parking brake engaged is dangerous Also when parked on an incl
248. oncentration of the outside air increases beyond a predetermined level Controls in detail Automatic climate control i If you keep button pressed the side windows and the sliding pop up roof will be closed Deactivating gt Press button EEJ The indicator lamp on the button goes out e If you keep button pressed the side windows and the sliding pop up roof will be returned to their previous position The automatic air recirculation mode does not function if the ACOFF mode is selected or if the outside temperature has fallen below 41 F 5 C The activated charcoal filter should be switched off when windows fog up on the inside or if the passenger compartment needs to be quickly heated or cooled down Rear window defroster The rear window defroster uses a large amount of power To keep the battery drain to a minimum switch off the defrost er as soon as the rear window is clear The defroster is automatically deactivated af ter approximately 6 to 17 minutes of oper ation depending on the outside temperature Activating gt Press button RR The indicator lamp on the button lights up Deactivating gt Press button ER again The indicator lamp on the button goes out A Any accumulation of snow and ice should be removed from the rear window before driv ing Visibility could otherwise be impaired endangering you and others Warning If the rear window defroster swit
249. onse Center or Customer Assis tance Center representative except Roadside Assistance and Information calls which can also be terminated by pressing button on the multifunc tion steering wheel i When a Tele Aid call has been initiated the audio system or the COMAND sys tem audio is muted and the selected mode radio tape or CD pauses The optional cellular phone if installed switches off If you must use this phone the vehicle must be parked Dis connect the coiled cord and place the call The COMAND navigation system if engaged will continue to run The display in the instrument cluster is available for use and spoken com mands are only available by pressing the RPT button on the COMAND unit A pop up window will appear in the CO MAND display to indicate that a Tele Aid call is in progress Remote door unlock In case you have locked your vehicle unin tentionally e g key inside vehicle and the reserve key is not handy gt Contact the Mercedes Benz Response Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada You will be asked to provide your pass word which you provided when you completed the subscriber agreement Then return to your vehicle and pull the trunk recessed handle for minimum of 20 seconds until the SOS button is flashing The message EMERGENCY CALL CALL CONNECTED appears in the multi function display As an alternative you may unlock the vehi cle via
250. op out of radiator grill Pull up on the hood do not pull up on the handle and then release it The hood will be automatically held open at shoulder height by gas filled struts Operation Engine compartment Warning A To help prevent personal injury stay clear of moving parts when the hood is open and the engine is running Make sure the hood is properly closed before driving When closing the hood use extreme caution not to catch hands or fingers The radiator fan may continue to run for ap proximately 30 seconds or even restart af ter the engine has been turned off Stay clear of fan blades Warning A If you see flames or smoke coming from the engine compartment or if the coolant tem perature gauge indicates that the engine is overheated do not open the hood Move away from vehicle and do not open the hood until the engine has cooled If necessary call the fire department Operation Engine compartment A The engine is equipped with a transistorized ignition system Because of the high voltage it is dangerous to touch any components ig nition coils spark plug sockets diagnostic socket of the ignition system Warning e with the engine running e while starting the engine e if ignition is on and the engine is turned manually Closing A Be careful that you do not close the hood on anyone Warning gt Let the hood drop from a height of ap proximately 1 ft 3
251. or a re placement It will be mailed to you Technical data Identification labels Identification labels 3 Information label California version Vacuum line routing for emission con trol system 4 Engine number engraved on engine 5 VIN visible lower edge of windshield 6 Emission control label When ordering spare parts please specify vehicle identification and engine numbers Layout of poly V belt drive C 230 Kompressor Sport P13 22 2050 31 1 Power steering pump 2 Idler pulley 3 Mechanical loader 4 Automatic belt tensioner 5 Air conditioning compressor 6 Crankshaft 7 Coolant pump 8 Generator alternator C 240 C 320 all models P13 20 2019 31 1 Idler pulley 2 Automatic belt tensioner 3 Power steering pump 4 Air conditioning compressor 5 Crankshaft 6 Coolant pump fan 7 Generator alternator Technical data Layout of poly V belt drive C 32 AMG 1 Idler pulley 2 Idler pulley 3 Supercharger 4 Automatic belt tensioner 5 Power steering pump 6 Air conditioning compressor 7 Crankshaft 8 Coolant pump fan 9 Generator alternator Technical data Engine Engine Model Engine Mode of operation No of cylinders Bore Stroke Total piston displacement Compression ratio Output acc to SAE J 1349 Maximum torque acc to SAE J 1349 Maximum engine speed Firing order Poly V belt C 230 Kompressor Sport 203 040 271 4 stroke en
252. or next display for previous display Center console Upper part Item Seat heater driver s side Rear window sunshade switch ESP control switch Hazard warning flasher switch switching on off Central locking switch Rear seat head restraints switch Anti theft alarm system in dicator lamp Tow away alarm switch Page 97 147 75 104 92 36 79 80 10 11 At a glance Center console Item Seat heater passenger side Indicator lamp Audio system or COMAND see separate operating instructions Climate control Automatic climate control Rear window defroster Page 97 67 260 165 148 156 153 162 At a glance Center console Lower part Item Ashtray Selector lever for automatic transmission Gearshift lever for manual transmission Storage compartment Cup holder Cigarette lighter 4 Armrest Program mode selector for automatic transmission Page 207 44 138 44 137 205 204 208 206 142 Overhead control panel P82 00 2182 31 _ a FF WN Item Rear interior lighting on off Sliding pop up roof Right reading lamp on off Interior lighting control Hands free microphone for Tele Aid emergency call system telephone and voice control system see separate operating instruc tions Rear view mirror Garage door opener Left reading lamp on off Tele Aid emergency call system butt
253. ored since the last engine start will be reset approximately four hours after the key in the starter switch is turned to position O or removed from the starter switch Resetting will not occur if you turn the key back to position 1 or 2 within this time period Resetting fuel consumption statistics Press button or repeatedly until you see the first function of the Trip computer menu Press button EAN or R repeatedly until you see the reading that you want to reset in the display Press and hold the reset knob in the instrument cluster gt page 22 until the value is reset to 0 Controls in detail Control system Call up range distance to empty gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the first function of the Trip computer menu Press button EN or R repeatedly until you see this message in the display RANGE In the display you will see the calculated range based on the current fuel tank level Controls in detail Control system TEL menu Warning A A driver s attention to the road must always be his her primary focus when driving For your safety and the safety of others we recommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a telephone call If you choose to use the telephone while driving please use the hands free device and only use the telephone when weather road and traffic conditions permit Some jurisdictions prohibit the
254. otion since the special seat belt retractor will be deactivated The use of infant or child restraints is required by law in all 50 states the District of Columbia the U S territo ries and all Canadian provinces Infants and small children should be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system properly secured by a lap shoulder belt or if so equipped a child restraint lower anchorage system that complies with U S Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210 2 A statement by the child restraint man ufacturer of compliance with this stan dard can be found on the instruction Safety and Security Occupant safety label on the restraint and in the instruc tion manual provided with the restraint When using any infant or child restraint system be sure to carefully read and follow all manufacturer s instructions for installation and use Please read and observe warning labels affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant or child restraints Warning A Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat except in a Mercedes Benz authorized BabySmart compatible child seat which operates with the BabySmart System installed in the ve hicle to deactivate the passenger front air bag when it is properly installed Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it in flates in a crash If this happens serious or fa
255. our passengers to fasten seat belts Practical hints What to do if Suggested solution gt gt gt gt gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Remove key from the starter switch Insert key in the starter switch Switch off lights Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Fasten the seat belts Practical hints What to do if Display PASSENGER SEAT BELT FASTEN SEAT BELT STEERING WHEEL ADJUST LOCK POWER STEERING FLUID VISIT WORKSHOP Warning A If the level of steering gear oil in reservoir is too low the steering power assistance could fail Much greater effort will then be needed to turn the steering wheel Do not add steering oil without checking the steering system Do not drive the vehicle Have the system checked at your authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Possible cause The display reminds you and your passengers to fasten seat belts The steering column is not properly locked The steering gear oil level is too low There is a danger of steering gear damage Suggested solution gt Fasten the seat belts gt Lock steering column gt page 37 gt Have the system checked by an a
256. our feet on the instrument panel or on the seat Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat Emergency tensioning device ETD seat belt force limiter The seat belts for the front and rear outer seats are equipped with emergency ten sioning devices and belt force limiters The ETD is designed to activate in the fol lowing cases when the seat belts are fas tened in frontal or rear end impacts exceeding a preset severity level if the restraint systems are operational and functioning correctly See GSS indicator lamp gt page 56 In an impact emergency tensioning devic es remove slack from the belts in such a way that the seat belts fit more snugly against the body Belt force limiters reduce the force exerted by the seat belts on oc cupants during a crash A An emergency tensioning device ETD that was activated must be replaced Warning When scrapping the emergency tensioning device our safety instructions must be fol lowed These are available at your autho rized Mercedes Benz Center Do not place objects heavier than 20 Ibs 9 kg on the front passenger seat This could cause the front or side impact airbag on the front passenger side to deploy in a crash which exceeds the system s deployment threshold Children in the vehicle If an infant or child is traveling with you in the vehicle e Secure the child using an infant or child restraint appropriate to the age and size of
257. oved on icy roads e Upshifts occur earlier even when you give more gas The engine then operates at lower roms and the wheels are less likely to spin e The power transmission ratio for se lector lever position R changes de pending on the program mode selected W or S Accelerator position Your driving style influences the transmis sion s shifting behavior Less throttle Earlier upshifting More throttle Later upshifting Kickdown Use kickdown when you want maximum acceleration gt Press the accelerator past the point of resistance The transmission shifts into a lower gear gt Ease on the accelerator when you have reached the desired speed The transmission shifts up again Controls in detail Automatic transmission Emergency operation Limp Home Mode If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no longer shifts the trans mission is most likely operating in limp home emergency operation mode In this mode only second gear and reverse gear can be activated Stop the vehicle Move selector lever to P v v Turn off the engine Wait at least ten seconds before restarting v v Restart the engine Move selector lever to position D for second gear or R gt Have the transmission checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Controls in detail Good visibility Good visibility Information on the windshield wipers gt
258. page 154 windshield free of snow and debris perature Do not obstruct air flow by placing ob D creasih jects on the air flow through exhaust 8 slots below the rear window gt Turn the control slightly to the left The climate control system will corre spondingly adjust the interior air tem perature Controls in detail Climate control Adjusting air distribution and volume Adjusting automatically Defrosting Use the air distribution control 4 gt Press the RE button gt page 149 to adjust the air distribution The indicator lamp on the button 7 tti hold oniy be selected The following symbols are found on the comes on The air distribution and vol f dis nae SOUVAN DE SESELE controls ume is adjusted automatically Ora STOLLE Symbol Function Windshield fogged on the outside Activating Directs air through the center switch the windshield wipers on gt Press button KAA side and rear passenger ee compartment air vents gt Switch to manual mode The indicator lamp on the button EPA comes on Directs air to the windows gt Turn the air distribution control i r or Directs air into the entire to or EM vehicle interior gt Switch off air recirculation if selected z Press button RJ Directs air to the footwells The indicator lamp on the button goes Adjusting manually out gt Press the H button gt Close center air vents The indicator lamp on the button goes gt Open left and right
259. peatedly gt page 145 I ON or OFF until you see this message in the ss Movethe selecti ker with display SETTINGS KEY DEPENDENT i N pied the or EES button to the The selection marker is on the current CONVENIENCE submenu setting gt Press button or repeatedly until you see this message in the display MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING gt Press or E to set key dependency to ON or OFF Controls in detail Control system Trip computer menu Fuel consumption statistics after start Fuel consumption since last reset o o tise deta computer teni tacai gt Press button or aa repeatedly gt Press button or aa repeatedly ner until you see the first function of the until you see the first function of the statistical data on your vehicle The rae o Trip computer menu Trip computer menu following information is available gt Press button EAN or Ryd repeatedly Press button EAN or RA repeatedly Function Page until you see this message in the until you see this message in the Fuel consumption statistics after see display AFTER START display AFTER RESET start below Fuel consumption statistics see since last reset below Call up range distance to empty 133 2 Time elapsed since start 2 Time elapsed since last reset 3 Average fuel consumption since start 3 Average fuel consumption since last 4 Average speed since start reset 4 Average speed since last reset i All statistics st
260. pener operator s manual gt Press training button on the garage door opener motor head unit The training light is activated You have 30 seconds time to initiate the following step gt Firmly press and release the pro grammed integrated remote control transmit button gt Press and release same button a sec ond time to complete the training pro cess Some garage door openers may require you to do this procedure a third time to complete the training gt Confirm the garage door operation by pressing the programmed button on the integrated remote control transmit ter Controls in detail Useful features Canadian programming During programming your hand held transmitter may automatically stop trans mitting gt Continue to press and hold the inte grated remote control transmitter but ton refer to steps two through four in the Programming portion while you press and re press cycle your hand held transmitter every two sec onds until the frequency signal has been learned Upon successful training the indicator lamp will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds Controls in detail Useful features Operating the remote control gt Turnkey in starter switch to position 1 or 2 gt Select and press the appropriate but ton to activate the remote controlled device The integrated remote control trans mitter continues to send the signal a
261. proper engagement before driving Adjust to a comfortable seating position that still allows you to reach the accelera tor brake pedal safely The position should be as far rearward as possible consistent with ability to properly operate controls i When moving the seat be sure that there are no items in the footwell or be hind the seats Otherwise you could damage the seats Seat cushion tilt gt Turn handwheel 2 forward or backward until your upper legs are lightly sup ported Getting started Adjusting Backrest tilt gt Press switch 3 in direction of arrow un til your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel Seat height gt Press switch 4 in direction of arrow un til your legs are lightly supported Head restraint height A For your protection drive only with properly positioned head restraints Warning Adjust head restraint to support the back of the head approximately at ear level Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints Head restraints are intend ed to help reduce injuries during an acci dent Getting started Adjusting A P91 16 2166 31 1 Release knob gt Manually adjust the height of the head restraint by pulling it upward To lower the head restraint push release knob 1 and push down on the head restraint Head restraint tilt gt Manually adjust the angle of the head restraint Push or pull on the lower edge
262. properly buckled Without your seat belt buckled you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are wearing your seat belt The airbags can only protect as ex pected if the occupants are using their seat belts gt page 61 Getting started Driving Warning A Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat except in a Mercedes Benz authorized BabySmart compatible child seat which operates with the BabySmart system installed in the ve hicle to deactivate the passenger side front airbag when it is properly installed Other wise they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash If this happens serious or fatal injury will result According to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat ing positions Infants and small children must ride in back seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system which is properly secured with the vehicle s seat belt and top tether strap or secured via lower anchors and top tether strap fully in accordance with the child seat manufactur er s instructions A child s risk of serious or fatal injuries is Getting started Driving significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly
263. r Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning A To reduce the risk of injury when the front airbags inflate it is very important for the driver and front passenger to always be in a properly seated position and to wear your seat belts For maximum protection in the event of a collision always be in normal seated position with your back against the backrest Fasten your seat belt and ensure that it is properly positioned on your body Since the airbag inflates with considerable speed and force a proper seating and hands on steering wheel position will help to keep you at a safe distance from the airbag Oc cupants who are unbelted out of position or too close to the airbag can be seriously in jured by an airbag as it inflates with great force in the blink of an eye Safety and Security Occupant safety e Sit properly belted in an upright position with your back against the seat back rest e Adjust the driver seat as far as possible rearward still permitting proper opera tion of vehicle controls The distance from the center of the driver s breast bone to the center of the airbag cover on the steering wheel must be at least ten inches 25 cm or more You should be able to accomplish this by a combina tion of adjustments to the seat and steering wheel If you have any prob lems please see your authorized Mercedes Benz Center e Do not lean with your head or chest close to the steering wheel or
264. r axle brake system Operational tests with the engine running can only be conducted on a two axle dynamometer Anti theft systems Immobilizer The immobilizer prevents unauthorized persons from starting your vehicle Activating e Removing the key from the starter switch activates the immobilizer Deactivating e Inserting the key in the starter switch deactivates the immobilizer i In case the engine cannot be started yet the vehicle s battery is charged the system is not operational Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call 1 800 FOR MERCedes in the USA or 1 800 387 0100 in Canada Anti theft alarm system Once the alarm system has been armed a visual and audible alarm is triggered when someone opens e a door e the trunk e the hood The alarm system will also be triggered when e someone attempts to raise the vehicle e the vehicle is opened with the mechan ical key i If the alarm stays on for more than 20 seconds an emergency call is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system gt page 209 provided Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated and that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are available Safety and Security Anti theft systems Arming the alarm system The alarm system is armed after locking the vehicle with the remote control The turn signal lamps blink three times to indicate that the alarm system is activated A
265. r lever lock is released More information can be found in the Controls in detail section gt page 138 For information on turning off the engine see Turning off engine gt page 53 Starting difficulties If the engine does not start as described carry out the following steps gt Turn key in starter to position O and re peat starting procedure gt page 44 gt Remember that extended starting at tempts can drain the battery gt Geta jump start gt page 306 If the engine does not start after several starting attempts there could be a mal function in the engine electronics or in the fuel supply system gt Notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Getting started Parking brake a o az j j 1 Release handle 2 Parking brake A Warning When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the starter switch and lock the ve hicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could release the parking brake which could result in an accident and or serious injury Getting started Driving gt Release the parking brake by pulling on handle 2 The indicator lamp USA only or Canada only in the instru ment cluster goes out Driving gt Depress the brake pedal gt Move selector lever to position D or R manual transmission first or reverse gear e Vehicles with automat
266. r than 20 Ibs 9 kg on the front passenger seat This could cause the front or side impact airbag on the front passenger side to deploy ina crash which exceeds the system s deployment threshold Side impact airbags window curtain airbags P91 60 2485 31 3 Side impact airbags 4 Window curtain airbag The side impact airbags and window cur tain airbags are deployed e onthe impacted side of the vehicle e inimpacts exceeding a preset deploy ment threshold e independently of the front airbags Safety and Security Occupant safety The front passenger side airbag will only deploy if the system senses that the front passenger seat is occupied The side impact airbags are not deployed in impacts which do not exceed the sys tem s deployment threshold Seat belts The seat belt nonusage warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up and a warning sounds for a short time when you turn the key in the starter switch to position 2 and the driver s seat belt is not fastened After starting the engine the seat belt non usage warning lamp blinks for a brief peri od to remind the driver and passengers to fasten the seat belts Safety and Security Occupant safety The use of seat belts and infant and child restraint systems is required by law in most states and all Canadian provinces Even where this is not the case all vehicle occupants should have their seat belts fas tened whenever t
267. re intend tion ed to help reduce injuries during an acci dea 5 2 gt Push button 1 and pull out head re straint e Installing front head restraints Tilt the backrest to the rear for easier gt removal and installation of the head re straints Insert head restraint and push it down to the stop gt Push button 1 and adjust head re straint to desired position Front seat head restraints power seat 40 P91 16 2157 31 Removing front head restraints gt gt Press switch 1 upwards and hold until the head restraint is fully extended Pull out head restraint Installing front head restraints gt Press switch 1 upwards and hold for about five seconds Push the head restraint down until it engages Adjust head restraint to desired posi tion gt page 34 Rear seat head restraints outer seats Warning A For safety reasons always drive with the rear head restraints in the upright position when the rear seats are occupied Keep the area around head restraints clear of articles e g clothing to not obstruct the folding operation of the head restraints The center rear seat head restraint can not be removed P91 16 2163 31 Controls in detail Seats Removing rear head restraints gt Pull head restraint to its highest posi tion gt Push button 1 and pull out head re straint Installing rear head restraints gt Insert head restrain
268. re that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure Warning The closing procedure of the sliding pop up roof can be immediately reversed by either moving the switch in any direction or press ing button on the key and holding it When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from starter switch take it with you and lock your vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and or serious personal injury gt Turn the key in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 Opening and closing the sliding pop up roof gt To open close raise or lower the slid ing pop up roof move the switch to re sistance point in the required direction Release the switch when the roof has reached the required position Opening and closing the sliding pop up roof automatically gt Move the switch past resistance point in the direction required and release The sliding pop up roof opens or clos es completely Stopping the sliding pop up roof gt Move the switch in any direction If the movement of the sliding pop up roof is blocked during the closing pro cedure the roof will stop and reopen slightly e You can also open or close the slid ing pop up roof using the e SmartKey see below e button in the control panel of the climate control gt page 149 or automatic climate contro
269. red indicator lamp in the switch for the tow away alarm gt page 80 will blink after approximately ten seconds when the alarm system is completely armed i If the turn signal lamps do not blink three times the tow away sensor is malfunctioning or one of the following elements may not be properly closed e a door e the trunk lid e the hood Close the respective element and lock the vehicle again Safety and Security Anti theft systems Disarming the alarm system The alarm system is disarmed when you unlock your vehicle with the remote control The turn signal lamps blink once to indicate that the alarm system is deactivated i The alarm system will rearm automati cally again after approximately 40 seconds if one of the doors or the trunk lid is not opened Canceling the alarm gt Insert the key in the starter switch or gt Press the or button on the key Tow away alarm Once the tow away alarm is armed a visual and audible alarm will be triggered when someone attempts to raise the vehicle i The tow away protection alarm is triggered for example if the vehicle is lifted on one side If the alarm stays on for more than 20 seconds an emergency call is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system gt page 209 provided Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated and that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are available Arming tow away alarm
270. remove the l key from the starter switch and lock your gem m i vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equip ment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury i The lighter socket can be used to ac commodate electrical accessories up to a maximum 85 W 1 1 Cigarette lighter 2 Cover gt Turn key in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 Slide cover 2 rearward Push in cigarette lighter 1 The lighter will pop out automatically when hot Telephone Warning A Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built in or attached antenna i e with out being connected to an external antenna from inside the vehicle while the engine is running Doing so could lead to a malfunc tion of the vehicle s electronic system pos sibly resulting in an accident and personal injury Radio transmitters such as a portable tele phone or a citizens band unit should only be used inside the vehicle if they are con nected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle The external antenna must be approved by Mercedes Benz Please contact an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center for informa tion on the installation of an approved external antenna Refer to the radio trans mitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna Warning A Please do not forget that your primary r
271. ront wheels and tread center wear on rear wheels Thoroughly clean the inner side of the wheels after each rotation Check and en sure proper tire inflation pressure A Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel Wheels could become loose if not tightened with a torque of 80 ft lb 110 Nm Warning Use only genuine Mercedes Benz wheel bolts specified for your vehicle s rims Winter driving Before the onset of winter have your vehi cle winterized at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center This service in cludes e Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze concentration e Addition of cleaning concentrate to the water of the windshield and headlamp cleaning system Add MB Concentrate S to a premixed windshield washer solvent antifreeze which is formulated for below freezing temperatures gt page 338 e Battery test Battery capacity drops with decreasing ambient temperature A well charged battery helps to ensure that the engine can be started even at low ambient temperatures e Tire change We recommend M S rat ed radial ply tires on all four wheels for the winter season Winter tires Always use winter tires at temperatures below 39 F 4 C and whenever wintry road conditions prevail Use of winter tires is the only way to achieve the maximum ef fectiveness of ABS ESP and 4MATIC in winter operation For safe handling ensure that all mounted winter tires are of the same ma
272. rotection e Boiling protection by increasing the boiling point The cooling system was filled at the factory with a coolant providing freeze protection to approximately 22 F 30 C and corro sion protection If the antifreeze mixture is effective to 22 F 30 C the boiling point of the coolant in the pressurized cooling system is reached at approximately 266 F 130 C The coolant solution must be used year round to provide the necessary corro sion protection and increase boil over pro tection You should have it replaced every 15 years or 150000 miles 250000 km whichever comes first Coolant system design and coolant used stipulate the replacement interval The above replace ment interval is only applicable if MB 325 0 anticorrosion antifreeze solution or other Mercedes Benz approved products of equal specification see Factory Approved Service Products pam phlet are used to renew the coolant con centration or bring it back up to the proper level To provide important corrosion protection the solution must be at least 45 anticor rosion antifreeze equivalent to freeze protection to approx 22 F 30 C If you use a solution that is more than 55 anticorrosion antifreeze freeze protec tion to approx 49 F 45 C the engine temperature will increase due to the lower heat transfer capability of the solution Therefore do not use more than this amount of anticorrosion antifreeze If the
273. s Some are poisonous others are flammable Always follow the instructions on the partic ular container Always open your vehicle s doors or windows when cleaning the inside Never use fluids or solvents that are not de signed for cleaning your vehicle While in operation even while parked your vehicle is subject to varying external influ ences which if gone unchecked can at tack the paintwork as well as the underbody and cause lasting damage Such damage is caused not only by ex treme and varying climatic conditions but also by e Air pollution e Road salt e Tar gravel and stone chipping To avoid paint damage you should imme diately remove e Grease and oil e Fuel e Coolant e Brake fluid e Insects e Tree resins etc Frequent washing reduces and or elimi nates the aggressiveness and potency of the above adverse influences More frequent washings are necessary to deal with unfavorable conditions e Near the ocean e In industrial areas smoke exhaust emissions e During winter operation Operation Vehicle care You should check your vehicle from time to time for stone chipping or other damage Any damage should be repaired as soon as possible to prevent corrosion In doing so do not neglect the underbody of the vehicle A prerequisite for a thor ough check is a washing of the underbody followed by a thorough inspection Dam aged areas need to be re undercoated Your veh
274. s long as the button is pressed up to 20 seconds Erasing the remote control memory gt gt Turn key in starter switch to position 1 or 2 Simultaneously hold down the left and right side buttons for approximately 20 seconds or until the indicator lamp blinks rapidly The codes of all three channels are erased i If you sell your vehicle erase the codes of all three channels Operation The first 1000 miles 1500 km Driving instructions At the gas station Engine compartment Tires and wheels Winter driving Maintenance Vehicle care Operation The first 1000 miles 1500 km In the Operation section you will find de tailed information on operating maintain ing and caring for your vehicle The first 1000 miles 1500 km The more cautiously you treat your vehicle during the break in period the more satis fied you will be with its performance later on e Drive your vehicle during the first 1000 miles 1500 km at varying but moderate vehicle and engine speeds e During this period avoid heavy loads full throttle driving and excessive engine speeds no more than ee of maximum rpm in each gear e Shift gears in a timely manner e Avoid accelerating by kick down e Do not attempt to slow the vehicle down by shifting to a lower gear using the selector lever e Select positions 3 2 or 1 only when driving at moderate speeds for hill driving After 1000 mil
275. s its path in a circumstance where you pulled the switch past the resistance point and released it to close the window the automatic reversal function will stop the window and open it slightly If the window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you are closing the window by pulling the switch and holding it there or by pressing and holding button on the SmartKey the automatic reversal function will not operate Controls in detail Power windows When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from starter switch take it with you and lock your vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and or serious personal injury gt Turn key in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 Opening the windows gt Press switch to resistance point The window will move downwards until you release the switch Closing the windows gt Pull on switch The window will move upwards until you release the switch Controls in detail Power windows If you pull and hold the switch up when closing the window and upward move ment of the window is blocked by some ob struction including but not limited to arms hands fingers etc the automatic reversal will not operate Fully opening windows gt Press switch past resistance point and release The window opens completely
276. s soon as possible at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center Failure to repair condition noted may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty or result in property dam age or personal injury Warning A No messages will be displayed if either the instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative Contact your nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Practical hints What to do if 5 Turning the key in starter switch to position 2 causes all lamps as well as the multifunction display to come on Ensure that they are all in working order before starting your journey On the pages that follow you will find a compilation of all the messages that may appear in the display Practical hints What to do if Display Possible cause Suggested solution ABS SYSTEM The ABS has detected a malfunction and gt Continue driving with added caution VISIT WORKSHOP has switched off The ESP and the BAS Wheels will lock in hard braking are also deactivated The brake system is reducing steering capability ene normally but without the gt Have the system checked at an AE S authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident DISPLAY DEFECTIVE The ABS or the ABS display is gt Continue driving with added caution VISIT WORKSHOP malfunctioning Wheels will lock in hard braking reducing steering capability
277. s the button for driver s side mirror gt page 39 Controls in detail Good visibility Headlamp cleaning system Sun visors The switch is located on the left side of the The sun visors protect you from sun glare dashboard while driving Warning A Do not use the vanity mirror while driving Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed while vehicle is in motion Reflected glare can endanger you and others 1 Mounting 2 Mirror cover 3 Mirror lamp L gt Swing sun visors down when you 4 Sun visor 1 Headlamp washer switch experience glare gt To use illuminated mirror lift up Switch on ignition cover 2 Press switch 1 e The headlamps are cleaned with a If sunlight enters through a side high pressure water jet window disengage sun visor from Information on filling up the washer mounting 1 and pivot to the side reservoir can be found in the Operation The mirror lamp 3 will switch off section gt page 241 Rear window sunshade The switch is located in the center console gt Turn the key to starter switch position 1 or 2 Press the switch briefly at 1 to raise the sunshade Press the switch briefly at 2 to lower the sunshade Always raise the sunshade fully for its sup port against the window frame Warning A When operating the rear window sunshade make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the raising or lowering pro cedure
278. senger compartment 230 Fuse box in 312 Inside rear view mirror 39 Interior lighting 105 Parcel net in front passenger footwell 206 Passenger safety see Occupant safety 56 Pedals 223 Performance In cold weather 335 In hot weather 335 Phone book Loading 135 Quick search 136 Phone number Dialing 135 Redialing 136 Plastic and rubber parts Cleaning 252 Playing CDs 179 Poly V belt drive 344 Layout 319 Positions Memory function Recalling from memory 99 Storing into memory 99 Power assistance 224 Power seat Adjusting backrest tilt 35 Adjusting head restraint height 35 Adjusting head restraint tilt 35 Adjusting seat cushion tilt 35 Adjusting seat height 35 Memory function 98 Removing installing head restraints 94 Seat fore and aft adjustment 34 Power train 344 Power washer 250 Power windows 187 Blocking of rear door window operation 71 Side windows 187 Synchronizing 189 Practical hints First aid kit 279 Fuses 312 Lamp in center console 260 Lamps in instrument cluster 256 Messages in the display 261 Minispare wheel bolts 284 Spare wheel 281 Spare wheel bolts 282 Towing the vehicle 308 Vehicle jack 280 Vehicle tool kit 279 Premium unleaded gasoline 333 Problems While driving 49 With vehicle 17 Product information 9 Program mode selector switch 344 Automatic transmission 142 Q Quick search Phone book 136 R Radio Selecting stations 117 Station search 117 Station selection setting 128 Radio m
279. senger side exterior rear view mirror is selected Adjust the exterior rear view mirror with button 2 so that you see the rear wheel and the road curb Press memory button M 1 on the door Within three seconds press bottom of adjustment button 2 above the exterior lamp switch The parking position is stored if the mirror does not move i If the mirror does move repeat the above steps After the setting is stored you can move the mirror again Lighting For notes on how to switch on the head lamps and use the turn signals see the Getting started section gt page 47 Exterior lamp switch The exterior lamp switch is located on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel SSS anes P54 25 2943 31 200 NIN U E Off Automatic headlamp mode Parking lamps also side marker lamps tail lamps license plate lamps instrument panel lamps Canada only When engine is running the low beam is also switched on Low beam plus parking lamps or high beam headlamps combination switch pushed forward Standing lamps right turn left one stop Standing lamps left turn left two stops Controls in detail Lighting i If you remove the key and open the driver s door while the parking lamps or low beam headlamps are switched on then e a warning sounds E appears in the multifunction display e the message TURN OFF LAMPS ap pears in the multifunction d
280. shown by the service indica tor To arrive at the true service dead line you will need to subtract these days from the days shown in the ser vice indicator Do not confuse the service indicator with the engine oil level indicator JRE Resetting the service indicator In the event that the service on your vehi cle is not carried out by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center you can reset the service indicator yourself gt Switch ignition on The standard display of the control sys tem appears gt page 116 gt Press button R or EAN on the mul tifunction steering wheel until the FSS indicator appears in the multifunction display gt Press the reset knob for about four seconds This message appears in the tachome ter DO YOU WANT TO RESET SERVICE INTER VAL CONFIRM BY PRESSING RESET R BUTTON gt To confirm hold down the reset knob until you hear a signal The service indicator now displays the reset interval If the service indicator was inadvertent ly reset have a Mercedes Benz Center correct it Only reset if the proper service has been performed Resetting the system without performing proper service as called for by the FSS will cause the FSS to incorrectly determine the next service interval which will result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Vehicle care Cleaning and care of vehicle Warning VAN Many cleaning products can be hazardou
281. ssemblies gt Switch off lights gt Open trunk lid P82 10 3053 31 2 Rear fog lamp driver s side P82 10 3140 31 3 Back up lamp 1 Screw 4 Stop lamp 5 Turn signal lamp 6 Tail parking standing and side marker Loosen both screws 1 and remove Switch off the lights i lamp lamp 1 Locking lever gt Gently push bulb into socket turn gt Replace the tubular lamp and reinstall Fold trim to the side counterclockwise and remove lamp gt Turn locking lever 1 to vertical position gt Insert new bulb and turn clockwise gt Retighten the screws and remove bulb carrier gt Reinstall bulb socket gt Reinstall bulb holder and close trim panel Practical hints Replacing wiper blades Replacing wiper blades Warning A For safety reasons remove key from starter switch before replacing a wiper blade other wise the motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury Removing gt Fold wiper arm forward P82 30 2159 31 gt Press safety tab down 2 gt Push wiper blade downward 1 and re move Replacing wiper blade inserts P82 30 2196 31 Place wiper blade on firm support Press down both tabs Slide direction of arrow the wiper blade insert out of the retainer claws Slide direction of arrow the new wiper blade insert into retainer claws until tabs are engaged Installing gt Slide wiper blade onto wiper arm until it locks in place Never open the hood
282. ssure cap on coolant More information on coolant can be found reservoir if engine temperature is 1 Coolant expansion tank in the Technical data section above 194 F 90 C Allow engine to _ D gt page 336 cool down before removing cap The gt Using a rag turn the cap slowly approx coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and imately one half turn to the left to re is under pressure lease any excess pressure e Using a rag slowly open the cap approx gt Continue turning the cap to the left and imately turn to relieve excess pres remove it sure If opened immediately scalding hot fluid and steam will be blown out un der pressure e Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts Antifreeze contains ethylene gly col which may burn if it comes into con tact with hot engine parts Operation Engine compartment Battery Your vehicle s battery is located in the en gine compartment gt page 303 The battery should always be sufficiently charged in order to achieve its rated ser vice life If you use your vehicle mostly for short dis tance trips you will need to have the bat tery charge checked more frequently When replacing the battery always use batteries approved by Mercedes Benz If you do not intend to operate your vehicle for an extended period of time consult an authorized Mercedes Benz Center about steps you need to observe DOP P Observe all safety instructions and pr
283. steered when the key is removed Warning A With the engine not running there is no power assistance for the brake and steering system In this case it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to stop or steer the vehi cle Warning A Do not park this vehicle in areas where com bustible materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re sult of vehicle movement before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always e Keep right foot on brake pedal e Firmly depress parking brake pedal e Move the selector lever to position P manual transmission first or reverse gear e Slowly release brake pedal e When parked on an incline turn front wheels towards the road curb e Turn the key to starter switch position 0 and remove e Take the key and lock vehicle when leaving Getting started Parking and locking Parking brake POTENSI Y P42 20 2121 31 1 Release handle 2 Parking brake gt Step firmly on parking brake 2 When the engine is running the indica tor lamp USA only or Canada only in the instrument cluster will be illuminated Getting started Parking and locking Warning A When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the starter switch and lock the ve hic
284. stments should not be altered in any way Moreover the specified service jobs must be carried out regularly according to Mercedes Benz servicing re quirements For details refer to the Service Booklet Operation Driving instructions Warning A Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide and inhaling it can cause uncon sciousness and lead to death Do not run the engine in confined areas such as a garage which are not properly ventilated If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving have the cause determined and corrected immediately If you must drive under these conditions drive only with at least one win dow fully open at all times Coolant temperature During severe operating conditions and stop and go city traffic the coolant tem perature may rise close to approx 248 F 120 C The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature over 248 F 120 C Doing so may cause serious en gine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Warning A e Driving when your engine is badly over heated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine com partment to catch fire You could be se riously burned e Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the engine hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from
285. t Press the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 1 A For your protection drive only with properly positioned head restraints Warning Adjust head restraint to support the back of the head approximately at ear level Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints Head restraints are intend ed to help reduce injuries during an acci dent Head restraint tilt gt Manually adjust the angle of the head restraint Push or pull on the lower edge of the head restraint cushion More information can be found in the Controls in detail section gt page 93 Getting started Adjusting Rear seat head restraints The rear seat head restraints can be folded backward for increased visibility Warning A For safety reasons always drive with the rear head restraints in the upright position when the rear seats are occupied Keep the area around head restraints clear of articles e g clothing to not obstruct the folding operation of the head restraints The center rear seat head restraint can not be adjusted Getting started Adjusting Folding head restraints back inthe rear Folding head restraints back with switch Placing head restraints upright passenger compartment in the center console 5 4 l P91 16 2155 3 TA gt Pull the head restraint forward until it 1 Lock button 1 Releasing head restraints locks into position gt Push lock button 1 gt Turn the key
286. t and push it down until it engages Push button 1 and adjust head re straint to desired position Controls in detail Seats Multicontour seat Some models may be equipped with driv er s multicontour seat This seat has a movable seat cushion and inflatable air cushions built into the backrest to provide additional lumbar and side support The seat cushion movement backrest cushion height and curvature can be con tinuously varied with regulators on the right side of the seat after turning the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 2 P91 25 2162 31 1 Seat cushion depth 2 Backrest bottom 3 Backrest center 4 Side bolster adjustment Adjusting the multicontour seat in the or der listed above is recommended gt Check that the ignition is switched on Alllamps in the instrument cluster light up The seat cushion movement backrest cushion height and curvature can be con tinuously varied with regulators 1 2 and 3 The side bolsters of the backrest can be adjusted with rocker switch 4 gt Press to the left Side support will be increased gt Press to the right Side support will be decreased i When the engine is turned off the last cushion setting is retained in memory and the cushion is automatically ad justed to this setting when the engine is restarted Controls in detail Seats Heated seats A red indicator lamp on the switch Switching off seat heating
287. t information Please observe the following in your own best interest We recommend using Mercedes Benz orig inal parts as well as conversion parts and accessories explicitly approved by us for your vehicle model We have tested these parts to determine their reliability safety and their special suitability for Mercedes Benz vehicles We are unable to make an assessment for other products and therefore cannot be held responsible for them even if in indi vidual cases an official approval or authori zation by governmental or other agencies should exist Use of such parts and acces sories could adversely affect the safety performance or reliability of your vehicle Please do not use them Introduction Product information Mercedes Benz original parts as well as conversion parts and accessories ap proved by us are available at your autho rized Mercedes Benz Center where you will receive comprehensive information also on permissible technical modifications and where proper installation will be per formed Introduction Operator s Manual Operator s Manual This Operator s Manual contains a great deal of useful information We urge you to read it carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving For your own safety and longer service life of the vehicle we urge you to follow the in structions and warnings contained in this manual Ignoring them could result in dam age to the veh
288. tainer Removing installing cover Ve gt Twist screws 1 90 counterclockwise gt Pull up cover 2 P54 15 2405 31 1 Cover gt Slide out retainer 3 and remove cover by pulling towards front gt Install cover 2 in reverse order Opening fuse box 4 Fuse box cover 5 Clamps gt Release clamps 5 gt Remove cover 4 Closing fuse box gt Ensure that the sealing rubber is prop erly positioned p gt Press the cover 4 down and secure with clamps 5 Auxiliary fuse box in trunk The auxiliary fuse box is located in the trunk 1 Trim panel 2 Cover of auxiliary fuse box 3 Special fuse extractor Opening gt Pull away trim panel 1 gt Remove cover 2 Practical hints Fuses Spare fuses Spare fuses are found in the vehicle tool kit in the spare wheel well Technical data Spare parts service Warranty coverage Identification labels Layout of poly V belt drive Engine Rims and Tires Electrical system Main dimensions Weights Fuels coolants lubricants etc Consumer information Technical data Spare parts service The Technical data section provides the necessary technical data for your vehicle Spare parts service All authorized Mercedes Benz Centers maintain a stock of original spare parts re quired for maintenance and repair work In addition strategically located parts distri bution centers provide quick and reliable parts
289. tal injury can result According to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat ing positions Infants and small children must ride in back seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system which is properly secured with the vehicle s seat belt and top tether strap or secured via lower anchors and top tether strap fully in accordance with the child seat manufactur er s instructions Infants and small children should never share a seat belt with another occupant During an accident they could be crushed between the occupant and seat belt A child s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Warning A Children too big for child restraint systems must ride in back seats using regular seat belts Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder not face or neck A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children from 41 Ibs un til they reach a height where a lap shoulder belt fits properly without a booster When the child restraint is not in use re move it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to prevent the child restraint from becoming a projectile in the event of an ac cident Do not leave children unattended in the ve hicle even if
290. tays on longer than ap proximately ten seconds If the indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance button is illuminated continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center es tablished then the Tele Aid system could not initiate a Roadside Assis tance call e g the relevant cellular phone network is not available The message ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE CALL FAILED appears in the multifunc tion display Roadside Assistance calls can be ter minated using the button on the multifunction steering wheel Information button Located below the center armrest cover is the Information button EER gt Press and hold the button for longer than two seconds A call to the Customer Assistance Cen ter will be initiated The button will flash while the call is in progress The message INFO CONNECTING CALL will appear in the multifunction display When the connection is established the message INFO CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunction display The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number model color and location subject to availability of cel lular and GPS signals A voice connection between the Customer Assistance Center representative and the occupants of the vehicle will be estab lished When a voice connection is estab lished the audio system mutes and the message TELE AID INFO CALL ACTIVE appears in the multifunction display Infor mation regardin
291. telephone is ready for use and you can ieit usinat eal cose When your telephone is ready to receive If your telephone is ready to receive calls OP er Sra Sie Soopers calls you can answer a call at any time In you may select and dial a number from the li the display you will then see the message phone book at any time Vehicles with audio system f E T gt Press button or repeatedly In top right corner the higher the i TEL 59 until you see the TEL menu in the dis number the stronger the signal l Z f play received from the net meme CALL i naan gt Press button BaN or RA p ee i baci aad sae A n C S0050 The control system reads the phone n top left corner the higher the book which is stored in the teleph gt Press button K ook which is stored in the telephone number of bars the stronger the signal This may take up to 30 seconds In the received from the net You have answered the call In the display you will see the message display you see the length of the call PLEASE WAIT Ending a call When the message PLEASE WAIT disappears the phone book has been gt Press button EN i aded You have ended the call In the display gt Press button BaN or RZA repeatedly you will again see the standby until the desired name appears in the message display The stored names are displayed in in creasing or decreasing alphabetical order gt D Controls in detail Control system i gt Press butt
292. ter Premix More inf ti b toundinth Only use washer fluid which is suitable the windshield washer fluid in a suitable P ee ae ems e for plastic lenses Improper washer flu container Technical data section gt page 338 id can damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps gt Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate and water or commercially available premixed wind shield washer solvent antifreeze de pending on ambient temperatures Operation Tires and wheels Tires and wheels See your authorized Mercedes Benz Cen ter for information on tested and recom mended rims and tires for summer and winter operation They can also offer ad vice concerning tire service and purchase Warning A Replace rims or tires with the same designa tion manufacturer and type as shown on the original part See your authorized Mercedes Benz Center for further informa tion If incorrectly sized rims and tires are mounted e The wheel brakes or suspension compo nents can be damaged e The correct operating clearance of the wheels and the tires are no longer guar anteed Warning A Worn old tires can cause accidents If the tire tread is badly worn or if the tires have sustained damage replace them When replacing rims use only genuine Mercedes Benz wheel bolts specified for the particular rim type Failure to do so can re sult in the bolts loosening and possibly an accident Retread tires ar
293. ter operation in structions regarding use of an external an tenna Catalytic converter Your Mercedes Benz is equipped with monolithic type catalytic converters an important element in conjunction with the oxygen sensors to achieve substantial con trol of the pollutants in the exhaust emis sions Keep your vehicle in proper operating condition by following our rec ommended maintenance instructions as outlined in your Service Booklet To prevent damage to the catalytic con verters use only premium unleaded gasoline in this vehicle Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation should be repaired promptly Otherwise excessive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic converter causing it to overheat and start a fire Warning A As with any vehicle do not idle park or op erate this vehicle in areas where combusti ble materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire Operation Driving instructions Emission control Certain systems of the engine serve to keep the toxic components of the exhaust gases within permissible limits required by law These systems of course will function properly only when maintained strictly ac cording to factory specifications Any ad justments on the engine should therefore be carried out only by qualified Mercedes Benz Center authorized techni cians Engine adju
294. the engine running Otherwise deadly carbon monoxide CO gases may enter vehicle in terior resulting in unconsciousness and death Warning To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation open a window slightly on the side of the ve hicle not facing the wind AN The outside temperature indicator is not de signed to serve as an ice warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose In dicated temperatures just above the freez ing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice Warning For more information see Winter driving gt page 245 Operation Driving instructions Standing water Do not drive through flooded areas or water of unknown depth If you must drive through standing wa ter drive slowly to prevent water from entering the passenger compartment or the engine compartment Water in these areas could cause damage to electrical components or wiring of the engine or transmission or could result in water being ingested by the engine through the air intake causing severe internal engine damage Any such damage is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Operation Driving instructions Passenger compartment Control and operation of radio trans Telephones and two way radios mitter Warning A Warning E AN COMAND radio and telephone Always fasten items being carried as Never operate radio transmitters evan securely as possible Warnine
295. the child and recommended for use by Mercedes Benz e Ensure that the infant or child is prop erly secured by a belt at all times while the vehicle is in motion Infant and child restraint seats and infor mation on choosing an appropriate re straint system can be obtained from any Mercedes Benz Center Infant and child restraint systems Use only a BabySmart compatible child restraint for the front passenger seat in this vehicle We recommend all infants and children be properly restrained at all times while the vehicle is in motion All lap shoulder belts except the driver s seat belt have special seat belt retractors for secure fastening of child restraints To fasten a child restraint follow child re straint instructions for mounting Then pull the shoulder belt out completely and let it retract During the seat belt retraction a ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate that the special seat belt retractor is acti vated The belt is now locked Push down on child restraint to take up any slack To deactivate release seat belt buckle and let seat belt retract completely The seat belt can again be used in the usual man ner e Information on child seats with anchor fittings for tether anchorages gt page 68 For information on child seat anchors LATCH type gt page 69 Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning A Never release the seat belt buckle while the vehicle is in m
296. the current setting LAMP CIRCUIT HEADLAMP MODE MANDALI CONSTANT P54 30 6591 31 gt Press or E to select manual or daytime running lamp constant mode This function is not available in countries where daytime running lamps are mandatory Control system With daytime running lamp mode selected and the exterior lamp switch at position 0 the following lamps will come on automatically when the engine is turned on e Parking lamps and low beam headlamps e License plate lamps in low ambient light conditions i If you turn the exterior lamp switch to another position the corresponding lamp s will switch on For safety reasons resetting the LIGHTING submenu to factory settings gt page 120 will not reset the daytime running lamp mode In the display you will then see the message LIGHTING CANNOT BE COMPLETELY RESET TO FACTORY SETTINGS WHILE DRIVING Controls in detail Control system Setting locator lighting During darkness the following lamps will come on when the exterior lamp switch is in position A the locator lighting feature is activated and the vehicle is unlocked by remote control e Parking lamps e Tail lamps e License plate lamps e Front fog lamps The locator lighting switches off when the driver s door is opened It switches off automatically after a period of approxi mately 40 seconds gt Move the selection marker with the or E but
297. the delayed shut off feature is activated You can temporarily deactivate the delayed shut off feature gt Before leaving the vehicle turn the key in the starter switch to position 0 gt Then turn it to position 2 and back to 0 The delayed shut off feature is deactivated It will reactivate as soon as you reinsert the key in the starter switch Controls in detail Control system Interior lighting delayed shut off Use this function to set whether and for how long you would like the interior lighting to remain lit during darkness after the key is removed from the starter switch gt Move the selection marker with the or E button to the LIGHTING submenu gt Press button EAN or Beg repeatedly until you see this message in the display INT LIGHTING DELAYED SHUT OFF bb Controls in detail Control system The selection marker is on the current setting gt Press or E to select the desired lamp on time period You can select 0 s the delayed shut off feature is deactivated 5 s 10s 15 sor20 s the delayed shut off feature is activated Vehicle submenu Access the VEHICLE submenu via the SETTINGS menu Use the VEHICLE submenu to make general vehicle settings The following functions are available Function Page Set station selection mode see radio below Set automatic locking 129 Setting station selection mode Use the PRESS BUTTON IN AUDIO MODE function to select t
298. the next vehicle maintenance service is due Gear range Number of gears which are available to the automatic transmission for shifting The automatic gear shifting process can be adapted to specific operating conditions using the selector lever GPS Global Positioning System Satellite based system for relaying geographic location information to and from vehicles equipped with special re ceivers Employs CD digital maps for navigation Instrument cluster The displays and indicator warning lamps in the driver s field of vision in cluding the tachometer speedometer and fuel gauge Technical terms Kickdown Menu Multifunction display Depressing the accelerator past the point of resistance shifts the transmis sion down to the lowest possible gear This very quickly accelerates the vehi cle and should not be used for normal acceleration needs Lock button Button on the door which indicates whether the door is locked or un locked Pushing the lock button down on an individual door from inside will lock that door Memory function Used to store three individual seat steering wheel and mirror positions for each key The control system displays are ar ranged in menus Each menu contains a number of commands for particular systems In the Audio menu for exam ple you will find the commands SELECT RADIO STATION or OPERATE CD PLAYER Using commands you can directly change the settings for your vehicle
299. the passengers e SP The tone level is set for Speech optimizing the sound for spoken language e AMB The tone level is set for Ambi ence producing a three dimen sional sound e OFF The audio system sound selec tion is turned off Telephone muting If a telephone has been installed in the ve hicle the radio will switch to telephone mode when a call is received The current audio source is muted Radio mode Selecting radio mode gt Press the button Selecting the band You can select from among FM AM or WB frequency bands FM frequency band FM ultra short wave 87 9 107 9 MHz AM frequency bands MW medium wave 530 1710 KHz WB long wave approx 162 KHz Controls in detail Audio system Selecting FM band gt Press the FM function button FM appears in the upper right hand cor ner of the display Selecting AM band gt Press the AM function button AM appears in the upper right hand cor ner of the display Selecting a station The following options are available for se lecting a station e Direct frequency band input e Manual tuning e Automatic seek tuning e Scan tuning e Station buttons e Automatic station memory Autostore Controls in detail Audio system Direct frequency input AM and FM only Manual tuning Automatic seek tuning Select the desired frequency band gt Select the desired band gt Select the desired frequency band
300. the wheel cover and pulling away from Position jack 1 under the take up bracket 2 so that it is always vertical plumb line as seen from the side even if the vehicle is parked on an incline the wheel gt Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a maximum of 1 2 in 3 cm from the ground Never start engine while vehicle is raised Practical hints Flat tire Removing the wheel Mounting the new wheel 1 Wheel bolts 2 must be used when mounting steel wheel rims or the Minispare wheel The use of any wheel bolts other than wheel bolts 2 for steel wheel rims or the Minispare wheel can cause physical damage to the vehicle P40 10 2768 31 P40 10 2770 31 To avoid paint damage place wheel flat against hub and hold it there while 1 Alignment bolt 1 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims S re 2 Wheel bolt for Minispare wheel or other installing first wheel bolt gt Unscrew upper most wheel bolt and steel rims bD remove gt Clean contact surfaces of wheel and gt Replace this wheel bolt with the wheel hub alignment bolt 1 supplied in the tool kit gt Guide the spare wheel onto the Remove the remaining bolts alignment bolt and push it on gt Insert wheel bolts and tighten them H slightly Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt This could result in damage to the bolt and wheel hub threads gt Remove the wheel Practical hints Flat tire Warning A Always replace wheel bolts that are
301. tic climate control panel 0 For draft free ventilation move the slid ers for the center air vents to the mid dle position Automatic climate control panel 10 11 12 13 14 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Item Temperature control left raising Left side air distribution control automatic or manual operation Activated charcoal filter Display Right side air distribution control automatic or manual operation Temperature control right raising Temperature control right lowering Rear window defroster AC cooling on off AcCOFF Residual heat ventilation Air volume control Automatic climate control on off complete system Air recirculation Defrosting Temperature control left lowering Controls in detail Automatic climate control The automatic climate control is operation al whenever the engine is running You can operate the climate control system in ei ther the automatic or manual mode The system cools or heats the interior depend ing on the selected interior temperature and the current outside temperature Nearly all dust particles pollutants and odors are filtered out before outside air en ters the passenger compartment through the air distribution system The air conditioning will not engage no cooling if the ACOFF mode is selected gt page 149 A Follow the recommended settings for heat ing and cooling given on the followi
302. tical initial letters e g The number search is called up for B Brown press button 2 twice Controls in detail Audio system Searching and selecting telephone book entries by number gt Press the NUM key The current number is marked in the display gt Press either the EN or R button The stored entries are selected accord ing to numerical order or gt Press the IXE or E button The stored entries are selected in in crements of four e g Entry M1 Entry M5 etc Starting dialing process gt Once you have selected a number press the SND key Repeat dialing If for example the number dialed is busy you can again place calls to the last ten telephone numbers dialed using the repeat dialing function Manual repeat dialing redial SHO ABC CLE EHC gt Press the SND key The last number dialed is shown in the display gt Select the desired telephone number using the MNS Mal ISN or BE button The abbreviation L and the number of the entry are shown in the top line of the display gt When you have selected a number press the SND key The call will then be placed Automatic repeat dialing redial If a call cannot be connected press the SND key REDIAL will appear on the display and re peated attempts to place the call will be made for the next four minutes Quick dialing gt Enter the previously selected three digit 1 999 number of the
303. ting 139 Setting the temperature 158 Opening and closing the windows 187 Gear ranges oes eesecceesenereneeeeeee 140 Adjusting air distribution 159 Synchronizing power windows 189 Gear selector lever position 141 Adjusting air VOIUME eseeeeeee 159 Sliding pop up roof eee eeeeeeeee 190 Program mode selector switch 142 Maximum cooling MAXCOOL 160 Opening and closing the Accelerator position 143 DOTOSTINE sevevaceccenvestdsivicseivetestedss 160 sliding POP UP roof 190 Emergency operation Air recirculation mode 006 160 Synchronizing the Limp Home Mode eeseeeeeee 143 Charcoal filter eee eeeteeeeeeeee 161 sliding pop up OOF ee eects 192 Good visibility 0 0 eee eens 144 Rear window defroster 00 162 Driving Systems 193 Rear view MIITOF cece eee eeeeee 144 Air conditioning eee 163 Cruise control oo eee eeeeeeeee 193 Headlamp cleaning system 146 Residual heat and ventilation 163 LOADING ssn eroe onnisti a 196 SUNVISO SA entieira 146 Rear passenger compartment Roof rack sis satecsivssuneoremscdectiansndes 196 Rear window sunshade 147 adjustable air vents cccesee 164 SKUSACK ede ceased caideoseveseeonteaseocadate 196 Climate control ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 148 Audio SYSTEM eeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeenees 165 Split rear bench seat eee 199
304. tion system 67 Tele Aid 210 Service Calling up the service indicator 248 Major service Service B 247 Minor service Service A 247 Overdue 247 Spare parts 316 Types 247 When due 247 Service and Warranty Booklet Loss of 317 Service and warranty information 10 Service indicator 247 Calling up 248 Clearing 247 248 Service life tires 243 Service see maintenance 247 Service System see FSS 247 Setting Convenience functions Cruise control 194 Daytime running lamp mode 125 Higher speed in cruise control 195 Hours clock 122 Individual vehicle settings 119 Instrument lighting 107 108 Interior lighting delayed shut off 127 Key dependent memory 131 Lamps and lighting control system 125 Language multifunction display 124 Locator lighting 126 Lower speed in cruise control 195 Miles kilometers in speedometer 123 Minutes clock 122 Night security illumination 126 Parking position for exterior rear view mirrors 131 Slower speed in cruise control 195 Speed in cruise control 195 Speedometer display mode 123 Station selection mode 128 Temperature Interior 158 121 129 Temperature interior 150 Temperature indicator 123 Time display mode Clock 123 Units Speedometer 123 Temperature 123 Settings Convenience functions 129 Factory SmartKey 85 Individual SmartKey 131 Lighting control system 125 Menus and submenus 113 Resetting all control system 120 Resetting inthe submenu 120 Selective 85 Settings menu
305. tional information on winter tires can be found under Winter tires gt page 245 A Even when permitted by law never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi mum speed rating of the tires Warning Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire fail ure causing loss of vehicle control and pos sibly resulting in an accident and or personal injury and possible death for you and for others Operation Driving instructions C 240 C 240 4MATIC C 320 and C 320 4MATIC Your vehicle is factory equipped with H rated tires which have a speed rating of 130 mph 210 km h An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph 210 km h C 230 Kompressor Sport C 320 Sport and C 320 4MATIC Sport Your vehicle is factory equipped with W rated tires which have a speed rating of 168 mph 270 km h An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph 210 km h C 32 AMG Your vehicle is factory equipped with Y rated tires which have a speed rating of 188 mph 300 km h An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 155 mph 250 km h Regardless of the tire speed rating local speed limits should be obeyed Use pru dent driving speeds appropriate to prevail ing conditions Winter driving instructions The most important rule for slippery
306. tivation sys tem will ONLY work with a special child seat designed to operate with it It will not work with child seats which are not BabySmart compatible Warning Never place anything between seat cushion and child seat e g pillow since it reduces the effectiveness of the deactivation sys tem The bottom of the child seat must make full contact with the passenger seat cushion An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause injuries to the child in case of an accident instead of protecting the child Follow the manufacturer s instructions for installation of special child seats When using a BabySmart compatible child seat on the front passenger seat the front passenger airbag will not deploy only if the indicator lamp remains illuminat ed Safety and Security Occupant safety A Please be sure to check the indicator every time you use the special system child seat Should the light go out while the restraint is installed please check installation If the light remains out do not use the BabySmart restraint to transport children on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired Warning A Warning Do not place powered on laptops cell phones and like electronic devices on the front passenger seat Signals from such de vices may interfere with the BabySmart system Such signal interference may cause the indicator lamp not to come on during self test or be continuously
307. tment 235 Fuse boxin 312 Hood 235 Engine malfunction indicator lamp 23 259 Engine number 342 Engine oil 236 332 Adding 237 Additives 332 Checking level 236 Consumption 236 Display messages 270 Fillerneck 237 Messages in display 238 270 Viscosity 342 Engine oil level see Oillevel 234 ESP 23 75 342 Four wheel electronic traction system with ESP 78 Messages in display 269 Switching off 76 Switching on 77 Warning lamp 256 ETD 64 342 Safety guidelines 59 Ethanol fuel At the gas station 233 Requirements 334 Switching fuels 334 Exterior lamp switch 47 101 Exterior lamps Delayed shut off 126 Exterior rear view mirrors Adjusting 39 Parking position for 131 F Fahrenheit Setting temperature units 123 Fastening the seat belts 41 Fine adjustment Cruise control 195 First aid kit 279 Flat tire 297 Lowering the vehicle 301 Mounting the spare wheel 297 Preparing the vehicle 297 Spare wheel 281 Flexible fuel vehicles 334 At the gas station 233 Switching fuels 334 Flexible Service System FSS 247 342 Fog lamp rear 103 291 Fog lamps Replacing bulbs 290 Fog lamps front 103 Messages in display 274 Replacing bulbs 291 Switching on 103 Four wheel electronic traction system 4MATIC with ESP 78 4MATIC 78 Front airbags 60 Front lamps Bi Xenon type 293 Halogen type 292 Messages in display 272 275 Replacing bulbs 290 292 Switching on 101 Front seat head restraints Installing 94 Manual seat 94
308. to link the vehicle to the shop diagnostics sys tem It allows the accurate identifica e The fuel management system e The emission control system e Systems which affect emissions Such malfunctions may result in excessive tion of system malfunctions through emissions values and may switch the engine the readout of diagnostic trouble to its limp home emergency operation codes It is located in the front left mode area of the footwell next to the park ing brake pedal The fuel cap is not closed tight gt Check the fuel cap Your gas tank is empty gt After refuelling start the engine three or four times in succession The limp home mode is canceled You do not need to have your vehicle checked The warning lamp reminds you to fasten seat Fasten your seat belt belts The fuel level has gone below the reserve gt Refuel at the next gas station mark gt page 233 Practical hints What to do if Lamp in center console Problem AIRBAG OFF AIRBAG OFF Possible cause The indicator lamp lights up A BabySmart child seat is installed on the front passenger seat Therefore the front passenger airbag is switched off The system is malfunctioning when there is no BabySmart child seat installed on the front passenger seat The indicator lamp does not light The system is malfunctioning up with a BabySmart child seat properly installed on the front passenger seat Suggested
309. ton to the LIGHTING submenu gt Press button EAN or eg repeatedly until you see this message in the display LOCATOR LIGHTING The selection marker is on the current setting P54 30 6592 31 gt Press or E to select the desired setting The locator lighting will be switched on or off jo Setting night security illumination Exterior lamps delayed shut off Use the HEADLAMPS DELAYED SHUT OFF function to set whether and for how long you would like the exterior lamps to illumi nate during darkness after all doors are closed When the delayed shut off feature is activated and the exterior lamp switch is in position R the following lamps will remain lit after you remove the key from the starter switch e Parking lamps e Tail lamps e License plate lamps e Front fog lamps You can reactivate this function within ten minutes by opening a door If you do not open a door after removing the key the lamps will automatically switch off after 60 seconds gt Move the selection marker with the or E button to the LIGHTING submenu gt Press button a or RA repeatedly until you see this message in the display HEADLAMPS DELAYED SHUT OFF The selection marker is on the current setting Lee LAMPS DELAYED SHUT OFF 60 s P54 30 6593 31 gt Press or E to select the desired lamp on period You can select e 0 s the delayed shut off feature is deactivated e 15 5 30 s 45 sor60 s
310. tory settings gt Press the reset knob in the instrument cluster gt page 22 for approximately three seconds In the display you will see the request to press the reset knob again to confirm P83 0 6582 31 gt Press the reset knob again The functions of all the submenus will reset to factory settings i The settings you have changed will not be reset unless you confirm the action by pressing the reset knob a second time Submenus in the Settings menu gt Press button RA or Bag In the display you see the collection of the submenus gt Press button EEJ The selection marker moves to the next submenu The submenus are arranged by hierarchy Scroll down with the JJ button scroll up with the button Move within the submenus with the Ryd or Ea button to the individual functions The settings themselves are made with button or Resetting the functions of a submenu For each submenu you can reset all the functions to the factory settings gt gt Move to a function in the submenu Press the reset knob gt page 22 inthe instrument cluster for approximately three seconds In the display you will see the request to press the reset knob again to confirm Press the reset knob again All functions of the submenu will reset to factory settings Controls in detail The table below shows what settings can be changed within the var
311. tton after un locking the vehicle The windows and sliding pop up roof begin to open after approximately one second Release transmit button to interrupt procedure Closing Convenience feature gt gt Press and hold button after lock ing the vehicle The windows and sliding pop up roof begin to close after approximately one second Release transmit button to interrupt procedure Ensure that all side windows and the slid ing pop up roof are properly closed be fore leaving the vehicle Controls in detail Power windows Synchronizing power windows The power windows must be resynchro nized each time after the battery has been disconnected gt Pull the power window switches until the side windows are closed and hold the switches for approximately one second Controls in detail Sliding pop up roof Sliding pop up roof Opening and closing the sliding pop up roof The sliding pop up roof can be opened and closed electrically The switch for the sliding pop up roof is on the overhead control panel P77 00 2129 31 1 Push back to slide roof open 2 Push forward to slide roof closed 3 Push up to raise roof at rear 4 Pull down to lower roof at rear With the roof closed or tilted open a screen can be slid into the roof opening to guard against sun rays When sliding the roof open the screen will also retract A When closing the sliding pop up roof make su
312. udio and telephone operation These instructions are intended to help you become acquainted with your Mercedes Benz car radio They contain useful tips and a detailed description of the user functions Warning A In order to avoid distraction which could lead to an accident system settings should be entered with the vehicle at standstill and systems should be operated by the driver only when traffic conditions permit Always pay full attention to traffic conditions first before operating system controls while driv ing Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your car is cover ing a distance of approximately 44 feet ap proximately 13 5 m every second The right to correct errors and make technical amendments is reserved Operating safety Warning VAN Any alterations made to electronic compo nents can cause malfunctions The radio cassette deck CD changer telephone and voice control system are interconnected When one of the compo nents is not operational or has not been removed replaced properly the function of other components may be impaired This condition might seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle We recommend that you have any service work on electronic components carried out by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Controls in detail Audio system Controls in detail Audio system Operating and display elements des Benz
313. und in the 3 Unlock button for doors Controls in detail section gt page 84 4 Panic button gt page 72 Starter switch positions i o Starter switch O For removing key The steering is locked when the key is removed from the starter switch If necessary move steering wheel slight ly to allow the locking mechanism to engage 1 Power supply to some electrical consumers such as seat adjustment 2 Ignition power supply for all electrical consumers and driving position 3 Starting position Warning A When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattend ed in the vehicle or with access to an un locked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury i Vehicles with automatic transmission The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P Getting started Unlocking If the key is left in starter switch position O for an extended period of time it can no longer be turned in the starter switch e Remove the key from the starter switch and reinsert If the key can still not be turned the battery may not be sufficiently charged e Check the battery and charge it if necessary gt page 240 e Geta jump start gt page 306 To prevent accelerated battery dis charge and a poss
314. unlock With Tele Aid 216 Doors Message in display 272 Opening from inside vehicle 87 Opening from outside 85 Downhill driving Cruise control 194 Downshifting 137 139 Drink holder see Cup holder Drinking and driving 223 204 Driving Driving abroad 230 General instructions 41 223 Hydroplaning 227 In winter 228 Problems 49 Safety systems 73 Through standing water 229 Driving abroad 230 Driving instructions 223 Driving off 225 Driving safety systems AMATIC 78 ABS 73 BAS 74 ESP 75 Driving systems 193 Cruise control 193 Driving safety systems 73 E Easy entry exit feature 93 Activating 129 Interrupting movement 93 130 Electrical fuses 312 Electrical system Technical data 326 Electronic Stability Program see ESP 23 75 342 Emergency call system 210 Emergency calls Initiating an emergency call 212 Telephone 185 With Tele Aid 211 Emergency operation Limp Home Mode 143 Emergency operations Closing sliding pop up roof 289 Locking the vehicle 286 Opening sliding pop up roof 289 Releasing trunk lid from inside 89 Remote door unlock 216 Unlocking the vehicle 285 Emergency tensioning device see ETD 64 342 Emission control 231 Emission control label 318 Ending A call telephone 135 Engine 320 Compartment 235 Message in display 259 Starting with automatic transmission 44 Starting with manual transmission 44 Starting with the key 44 Turning off with the key 53 Engine cleaning 250 Engine compar
315. ur health All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide and inhaling it can cause uncon sciousness and lead to death Automatic transmission Do not run the engine in confined areas such as garage which are not properly ven tilated If you think that exhaust gas fumes Gearshift pattern for manual transmission Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission are entering the vehicle while driving have gt Make sure that the gearshift lever is in the cause determined and corrected imme Neutral position P Park position with selector lever lock diately If you must drive under these condi R Reverse gear tions drive only with at least one window Do not depress accelerator N Neutral fully open gt Fully depress clutch pedal D Drive position Otherwise the engine cannot be start Make sure that the gear selector lever ed due to the integrated safety inter issettoP lock Do not depress accelerator gt Turn the key in the starter switch to position 3 Release only when the en gine is firing regularly gt page 31 Turn the key in the starter switch to position 3 Release only when the en gine is firing regularly gt page 31 More information can be found in the ae Controls in detail section gt page 137 i You can also use the touch start function Turn the key to position 3 and release it again immediately The en gine then starts automatically gt Depress the brake pedal The selecto
316. ure than category 1 has been subject to repair four or more times and you have direct ly notified us in writing of the need for its repair or Introduction Operator s Manual 3 the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different sub stantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calender days Written notification should be sent to us not a dealer at Mercedes Benz USA LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes Drive Montvale NJ 07645 0350 Introduction Operator s Manual Maintenance The Service Booklet describes all the nec essary maintenance work which should be performed at regular intervals Always have the Service Booklet with you when you take the vehicle to your autho rized Mercedes Benz Center for service The service advisor will record each ser vice in the booklet for you Roadside Assistance The Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance Program provides factory trained technical help in the event of a breakdown Calls to the toll free Roadside Assistance number 1 800 FOR MERCedes in the USA 1 800 387 0100 in Canada will be answered by Mercedes Benz Cus tomer Assistance Representatives 24 hours a day 365 days a year For additional information refer to the Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance Pro gram brochure in your glove box Change of address or ownership If you change your address be sure to send in the
317. usting 32 Air distribution 151 159 Airvolume 151 159 Backrest tilt 33 35 Exterior rear view mirror 39 Head restraint height 33 35 37 Head restraint tilt 34 35 36 Head restraints 36 Inside rear view mirror 39 Instrument cluster illumination 107 Manual seat 33 Mirrors 39 Multicontour seat 96 Power seat 34 Rear seat head restraints 35 Seat belt height 43 Seat cushion depth 96 Seat cushion tilt 33 35 Seat fore and aft adjustment 33 34 Seat height 33 35 Seats 32 33 Steering column height 37 38 Steering column length 37 38 Steering wheel 37 Air conditioner cooling Turning off 154 163 Turning on 154 163 Air conditioning refrigerant 332 Air distribution Adjusting Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure 243 Air recirculation mode 152 160 Activating 152 160 Deactivating 152 161 151 159 Air vents rear passenger compartment Adjustable 155 164 Air volume Adjusting 151 159 AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 260 Airbags 57 BabySmart deactivation system 67 341 Children 58 Front 60 Passenger 61 Safety guidelines 59 Side impact 61 Window curtain 61 Alarm Audible 72 80 Canceling 80 Visual 79 Alarm system Anti theft 79 Tow away 80 Alignment bolt vehicle tool kit 299 341 Anticorrosion antifreeze 337 Antiglare Automatic 144 Manual 144 Antilock brake system ABS Anti theft alarm system Arming 79 Canceling alarm 80 Disarming 80 Anti theft systems 79 Anti theft alarm system 79 Imm
318. uthorized Mercedes Benz Center Practical hints What to do if Display Possible cause Suggested solution TELE AID One or more main functions of the Tele Have the Tele Aid system checked by VISIT WORKSHOP Aid system are malfunctioning an authorized Mercedes Benz Center FUNCTION This display appears if button NOT AVAILABLE or on the multifunction steering wheel is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped with a telephone SRS RESTRAINT SYSTEM The system is malfunctioning gt Drive with added caution to the VISIT WORKSHOP nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Warning A In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi cated as outlined above the SRS may not be operational For your safety we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately to have the system checked otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident which could result in serious or fatal injury or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury Practical hints What to do if Display UNDERVOLTAG ENGINE ON UNDERVOLTAGE SWITCH CONS VISIT WORKS DISPLAY DEF VISIT WORKS DISPLAY DEF EJ WASHER FLUI CHECK LEVEL E UMERS OFF HOP ECTIVE HOP ECTIVE D Possible cause The battery has insufficient voltage and can no longer supply the convenience functions such as seat heater The battery is malfunctio
319. v mately Tag in 1 5 mm at which point ing the tire is considered worn and should be replaced A Do not drive with a flat tire A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle You may lose control of the vehicle Continued driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build up and possibly a fire Warning Hydroplaning Depending on the depth of the water layer on the road hydroplaning may occur even at low speeds and with new tires Reduce vehicle speed avoid track grooves in the road and apply brakes cautiously in the rain Tire traction The safe speed on a wet snow covered or icy road is always lower than on a dry road You should pay particular attention to the condition of the road whenever the outside temperatures are close to the freezing point A If ice has formed on the road tire traction will be substantially reduced Under such weather conditions drive steer and brake with extreme caution Warning Mercedes Benz recommends M S rated radial ply tires for the winter season for all four wheels to insure normal balanced handling characteristics On packed snow they can reduce your stopping distance compared to summer tires Stopping dis tance however is still considerably great er than when the road is not covered with snow or ice Exercise appropriate caution Operation Driving instructions Tire speed rating Addi
320. wer vehicle by turning crank counterclockwise until vehicle is resting fully on its own weight gt Remove the jack P40 10 2769 31 1 5 Wheel bolts gt Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly following the diagonal sequence illustrated 1 to 5 until all bolts are tight Observe a tightening torque of 80 ft Ib 110 Nm Practical hints Flat tire Warning A Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel The wheels could come loose if they are not tightened to a torque of 80 ft Ib 110 Nm gt Before storing the jack in the trunk it should be fully collapsed with handle folded in storage position gt page 280 Practical hints Flat tire P40 10 2706 31 Wheel cover on vehicles with steel rims Canada only gt Position small wheel cover opening over tire valve and press wheel cover against wheel rim gt Now press do not hit opposite side of wheel cover against wheel rim until seated Make certain that the springs of the wheel cover are firmly seated in the outer rim of the steel wheel Battery The battery is located in the engine com partment on the right hand side N Y G ia a k Removal of filter box gt Release the three clamps 1 gt Remove filter box Installation of filter box gt Insert filter box properly gt Secure it with the three clamps 1 er Warning A Failure to follow these instructions can re sult in severe
321. wering or placing a call E H The initial activation of the Tele Aid system may only be performed by completing the subscriber agreement and placing an acquaintance call using the SOS button Failure to complete either of these steps will result in a system that is not activated If the system is not activated the indicator lamp in the SOS button stays on after turning key in starter switch to position 2 and the message TELE AID NOT ACTIVATED will be shown in the multifunction display for approx ten seconds If you have any questions regarding ac tivation please call the Response Cen ter at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada Controls in detail Useful features The Tele Aid system Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response e automatic and manual emergency e roadside assistance and e information The Tele Aid system is operational provid ing that the vehicle s battery is charged properly connected not damaged and cel lular and GPS coverage is available The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can be adjusted when using the volume control on the multifunction steering wheel To raise press button and to lower press button EE gt To activate press the SOS button the Roadside Assistance button or the Information button JR depend ing on the type of response required 1O The SOS button is locat
322. wheel gt Lift up the trunk floor cover gt Loosen retaining screw 1 inthe middle of storage well casing 2 gt Remove storage well casing 2 P68 00 3087 31 1 Retaining screw 2 Storage well casing bb Practical hints Where will I find gt Remove vehicle tool kit storage well Vehicle jack Vehicles with full size tire spare wheel casing 5 68 00 3088 31 3 Arrow 4 Minispare wheel 5 Vehicle tool kit storage well casing 6 Vehicle tool kit Wheel wrench Vehicle jack i Arrow 3 on vehicle tool kit storage well casing 5 must point in the direction of travel Otherwise you cannot place the storage well casing on top and secure the Minispare wheel with retaining screw 1 gt page 279 Warning A The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack take up brackets built into both sides of the vehicle To help avoid personal injury use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack Keep hands and feet away from the area under the lifted vehicle Always firmly set parking brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with jack Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is raised Be certain that the jack is always vertical plumb line when in use especially on hills Always try to use the jack on level surface Make sure that the jack arm is fully seated in the jack take up bracket A
323. when the wiper arm is folded forward Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the windshield glass without a wiper blade inserted Make certain that the wiper blades are properly installed Improperly installed wiper blades may cause windshield damage For your convenience we recommend that you have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Flat tire Preparing the vehicle gt Park the vehicle as far as possible from moving traffic on a hard surface Turn on the hazard warning flashers Engage the steering wheel lock in the straight ahead position and set the parking brake gt Move the selector lever to P manual transmission to first or reverse gear gt Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the roadway Mounting the spare wheel gt Prepare the vehicle as described under Preparing the vehicle on this page gt Take the spare wheel out of the trunk as described on gt page 281 full size tire spare wheel or gt page 282 Minispare wheel Lifting the vehicle gt Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking wheels with wheel chocks not included or other sizable objects When changing wheel on a level surface gt Place one chock in front of and one behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel being changed When changing wheel on a hill gt Place chocks on the downhill side blocking both wheels of the other axle gt Tak
324. will open Press SOS button 2 briefly The indicator lamp in the SOS button 2 will flash until the emergency call is concluded gt Wait for a voice connection to the Re sponse Center gt Close cover 1 after the emergency call is concluded A If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the vehicle e g smoke or fire in the vehicle ve hicle in a dangerous road location please do not wait for voice contact after you have pressed the emergency button Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a safe loca tion The Response Center will automatically contact local emergency officials with the vehicle s approximate location if they re ceive an automatic SOS signal and cannot make voice contact with the vehicle occu pants Warning Roadside Assistance button Located below the center armrest cover is the Roadside Assistance button Bag gt Press and hold the button for longer than two seconds A call to a Mercedes Benz Roadside As sistance dispatcher will be initiated The button will flash while the call is in progress The message ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE CONNECTING CALL will appear in the multifunction display When the connection is established the message ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunc tion display The Tele Aid system will trans mit data generating the vehicle identification number model color and lo cation subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals
325. windows gt page 189 e Resynchronize sliding pop up roof gt page 191 Practical hints Battery Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly Large 12 volt storage batteries contain lead Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling Practical hints Jump starting Jump starting Warning A Failure to follow these directions will cause damage to the electronic components and can lead to a battery explosion and severe injury or death Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump starting you might get injured Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes skin or clothing In case it does immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary A battery will also produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and very explosive Keep flames or sparks away from battery avoid improper connection of jumper cables smoking etc Read all instructions before proceeding If the battery is discharged the engine can be started with jumper cables and the bat tery of another vehicle Observe the follow ing e Jump starting should only be performed when the engine and catalytic convert er are cold e Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen Let the battery thaw out first e Only jump
326. wn arrow gt Swing cover 1 down gt D Controls in detail Loading gt Open hook and loop strap 2 gt Open flap in trunk by pulling handle 3 From trunk slide skis into ski sack gt Pull ski sack into passenger compart Warning A ment and unfold The ski sack is designed for up to four pairs of skis Do not load the ski sack with other objects i aa Re SS 49 08 27 31 n Always fasten the ski sack securely In an accident an unfastened ski sack can cause injury to vehicle occupants gt D Controls in detail Unloading and folding A P91 12 2429 31 gt Wrap strap 4 around ski sack and arm gt Connect snap hook 6 of front strap to rest eye 7 located on center tunnelinfront p gt Loosen strap open clasp by pressing gt Close clasp 5 arrows and pull strap of rear seat bench tabs 8 together arrows tight to immobilize skis gt Unload skis gt Close flap in trunk gt Disconnect snap hook 6 from eye 7 gt Fold and flatten ski sack lengthwise and place folded ski sack inside recess of backrest gt D agi 7 91 12 2436 31 gt Close ski sack compartment cover 1 Removal of ski sack For removal of the ski sack we recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Warning A Never drive vehicle with trunk lid open while the ski sack is removed Deadly carbon monoxide CO gases may enter vehicle in terior
327. x gt Push lid up to close Controls in detail Useful features i Prior to closing the glove box close the compartment for glasses first Locking the glove box gt Insert mechanical key gt page 285 into the glove box lock and turn it to position 2 Unlocking the glove box gt Turn mechanical key gt page 285 in the glove box lock to position 1 Controls in detail Useful features Cup holder in front of seat armrest Warning A When not in use keep the cup holder closed Place only containers that fit into the cup holder to prevent spills Use lids on open containers and do not fill containers to o a height where the contents especially hot liquids could spill during vehicle maneu vers A E gt Slide cover 1 rearward gt Push button 2 Opening cup holder The cup holder opens automatically Closing cup holder N d 68 00 3063 31 l gt Fold in direction of arrow until cup holder engages Controls in detail Useful features Cup holder in rear seat armrest Storage compartment in front of arm rest Warning A When not in use keep the cup holder closed Place only containers that fit into the cup holder to prevent spills Use lids on open containers and do not fill containers to F a height where the contents especially hot tr ARATE liquids could spill during vehicle maneu a vers Opening cup holder i Sees gt Push front of slidin
328. y road conditions you discover operate your hazard warning flashers as appro priate Warning A The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency be yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or aquaplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The ca pabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or danger ous manner which could jeopardize the us er s safety or the safety of others ABS control The malfunction indicator lamp in the speedometer lights up when you turn the key in the starter switch to position 2 It goes out when the engine is running More information can be found in the Practical hints section gt page 257 BAS The Brake Assist System BAS operates in emergency situations If you apply the brakes very quickly the BAS automatically provides full brake boost thereby poten tially reducing the braking distance Apply continuous full braking pressure until the emergency braking situation is over The ABS will prevent the wheels from locking When you release the brake pedal the brakes function again as normal The BAS is then deactivated Warning A The BAS cannot prevent the
329. y fasten the hook 2 to the an gt Grip inner side of anchors 1 and fold chorage ring 3 forward until they lock in place ri gt Install child seat according to the man ufacturer s instructions and attach it For safety make sure that the hook has firmly in the right and left anchors 1 attached to the ring beyond the safety catch as illustrated gt Reinstall cover 1 after removing the tether strap Safety and Security Occupant safety i With a child seat installed in the left rear seat the seat belt for the center seat occupied by a passenger must op erate freely Guide seat belt between its seat cushion mount and backrest mount along outside of right side child seat anchor To fold anchors back gt Press down button 2 on each anchor and return anchor 1 to its catch i Non LATCH type child seats may also be used and can be installed using the vehicle s seat belt system Install child seat according to the manufacturer s instructions N Damaged or impact damaged child seats or Warning j child seat anchors 1 must be replaced Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle even if the children are secured in a child restraint system Children too big for child restraint systems must ride in back seats using regular seat belts Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder not face or neck A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children
330. y from the starter switch or gt Turn control knob ROJ Adjusting the volume gt Turn control knob ROJ The volume will increase or decrease according to the direction turned i If your vehicle was equipped with a telephone and voice control system and both are connected to the car radio their volume can be adjusted separately while the telephone is being used or voice control system is activated Adjusting audio functions In radio cassette and CD mode press the AUD key to call up the bass treble balance and fader functions Settings for bass and treble are stored sep arately for the AM medium wave long wave short wave and FM ultra short wave frequency bands cassette mode and CD mode Bass gt gt In radio cassette and CD mode press the AUD key repeatedly until BASS ap pears on the display FMi BASS nnn nnn oS AUD gt Press the or key to increase or de crease the tone level accordingly or Press both the and keys simulta neously to reset the bass tones to the center flat level Treble In radio cassette and CD mode press the AUD key repeatedly until TREBLE ap pears on the display Fi TREBLE gt Press the or key to increase or de crease the tone level accordingly or gt Press both the and keys simulta neously to reset the treble tones to their center flat level Controls in detail Audio system Fader FM
331. y to have the system checked otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an acci dent which could result in serious or fatal injury or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury Improper work on the restraint systems including incorrect installation and removal can lead to possible injury through an unin tended activation of the SRS In addition through improper work there is a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended airbag deployment Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Airbags Warning A Airbags are designed to reduce the potential of injury in certain frontal front airbags im pacts or side side impact and head protec tion window curtain airbags impacts which may cause significant injuries However no system available today can totally eliminate injuries and fatalities The activation of the SRS temporarily releas es a small amount of dust from the airbags This dust however is neither injurious to your health nor does it indicate a fire in the vehicle The dust might cause some tempo rary breathing difficulty for people with asth ma or other breathing trouble To avoid this you may wish to get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so If you have any breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the airbag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or doo

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

LDC-28WHIV  Seiko Kinetic Titanium Watch    owner`s manual manuel d`utilisateur manual del propietario    Operating Manual  User Manual Handling Instructions Battery Pack 8LP5200V22  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file